JP6550904B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game has been executed.

  Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that provides a plurality of types of bonus games by controlling the opening and closing of two ball entrances as bonus games.

JP 2003-265765 A

  By the way, the above-described gaming machine only performs control to switch the entrance to be opened as a bonus game, and further enhancement of the interest of the game has been demanded.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved in the above-described gaming machine.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention includes a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, and a first launching means capable of entering a game ball launched from the launching means. A second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a first discrimination means capable of executing a first discrimination based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means. And a second determination means capable of executing a second determination based on the game ball entering the second entry means, and a first determination of the first determination by the first determination means. Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means first identification information for indicating a result and second identification information for indicating a second discrimination result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means And the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. When the second identification information for indicating is displayed on the display means, a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, and an open state in which a game ball can enter And a first variable ball entry means that can be changed to a closed state in which entry of a game ball is more difficult than an open state thereof, and a downstream side of the first variable ball entry means. A second variable entry means that can be changed between a possible open state and a closed state in which entry of a game ball is more difficult than the open state; and a game ball that has entered the second variable entry means In the case where the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means , and the bonus granting means for awarding a bonus advantageous to the player based on the possible specific area and that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area, Game state setting for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states Means, variable control means capable of varying the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means as a predetermined variable pattern as the bonus game, and the variable variable by the variable control means. Determining means capable of determining a pattern from a plurality of different variable patterns, and the game balls that have not entered the first variable entry means are the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means. It is possible to be guided to the second variable pitching means after rolling a guide path disposed between the variable pitching means and a predetermined period or more, and the plurality of different variable patterns include the first variable pitching means . 1) After the variable ball entering means is closed, the game ball having entered the second variable ball entering means in the period after the predetermined period or more has elapsed is open in a state where the ball can enter the specific area. and advantageous variable pattern but is set, the After the first variable ball entry means is closed, the ball enters the second variable ball entry means by rolling the guide path for the predetermined period without entering the first variable ball entry means. At least a disadvantage variable pattern in which the open state is set so that the game ball can not pass through the specific area is set , and the game machine is set by the game state setting unit. The ratio between the advantageous variable pattern and the disadvantageous variable pattern determined by the determination means is set variably according to the state.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the launching means capable of launching a game ball based on the player's operation, the first launching means capable of entering the game ball launched by the launching means, and the first A second entry means different from the entry means, a first discrimination means capable of executing a first discrimination based on a game ball entering the first entrance means, and the second Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means, a second discrimination means capable of executing the second discrimination, and a first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means first identification information and second identification information for indicating a second discrimination result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means; The first identification information for indicating a first determination result or the above for indicating a specific second determination result 2) A bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed on the display means, an open state in which the game ball can enter and a state more than the open state A first variable pitching means that can be changed to a closed state in which it is difficult to enter a game ball; and an open state that is disposed downstream of the first variable pitching means and into which a game ball can enter; A second variable ball entry means that can be changed to a closed state in which entry of a game ball is more difficult than an open state; a specific area in which a game ball that has entered the second variable ball entry means can enter; Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area, the privilege giving means for giving the player an advantageous benefit, and , when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means, a plurality of different gaming states A gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state, and the privilege As a technique, a variable control means capable of changing the first variable entrance ball means and the second variable entrance ball means in a predetermined variable pattern, and the variable pattern variable by the variable control means are different from each other. A game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means; Can be guided to the second variable entry means after rolling a guide path arranged between the first and the second variable entry patterns. The plurality of different variable patterns include the first variable entry means. After the game is in the closed state, an open state is set in a state in which a game ball that has entered the second variable entry means can enter the specific area in a period after the predetermined period has elapsed. A variable pattern and the first variable ball entry means After entering the closed state, the game ball entering the second variable entry means by rolling the guide path for the predetermined period without entering the first variable entry means is the specific area. The disadvantage variable pattern in which the open state is set so as to be impassable is set at least, and the gaming machine corresponds to the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means. Since the ratio between the advantageous variable pattern and the disadvantageous variable pattern determined by the determination means is variably set, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus of La-La cross section, (b) is Lb-Lb sectional drawing, (c) is a top view of a variable winning apparatus. (A)-(b) is a rear view of a part of variable winning prize apparatus. (A) is a flow chart showing transition of the gaming state in the first embodiment, and (b) is a case where the jackpot type selected in each gaming state in the first embodiment and the jackpot type are selected It is the schematic diagram which showed the game state which transfers to. (A) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) of the display mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode in the probability variation gaming state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode in the probability variation gaming state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed the frame button in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a figure which showed the selection switch in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the 1st random number table in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the small hit random number table in 1st Embodiment typically, c) is a diagram schematically showing a second per-random number table in the first embodiment. FIG. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the jackpot classification selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus 110 in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus 110 in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus 110 in 1st Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of RAM of the main control apparatus 110 in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic view of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. It is the model which showed the content of RAM223 typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation fluctuation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 removal stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 outage stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 1 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the stop type command reception process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command process which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the notification lottery process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the state command reception process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode in the normal play state or the latent probability change play state displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode in the latent probability variation game state or probability variation game state displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. It is the enlarged view which expanded a part of front of the game board of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the transition of the game state in 2nd execution form. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the big hit game in 2nd execution form. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment, (b) showed typically the content of RAM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. (A) is the figure which showed typically the 1st random number table in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the small hit random number table in 2nd Embodiment typically, (c) is a diagram schematically showing a second random number table in the second embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the jackpot classification selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 2nd Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the jackpot classification selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 2nd Embodiment. It is the model which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus 110 in 2nd Embodiment. It is the model which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus 110 in 2nd Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus 110 in 2nd Embodiment. It is the model which showed an example of the common drawing fluctuation pattern table set to ROM of the main control apparatus 110 in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the small hitting type selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the main controller 110 in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the special motorized service thing working table set to ROM. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM of MPU221 of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is MPU221 of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of RAM typically. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flow diagram showing transition of the gaming state in the first modified example of the second embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flow diagram showing transition of a gaming state in a second modified example of the second embodiment. It is the enlarged view to which a part of game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd modification of a 2nd embodiment was expanded.

First Embodiment
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 58, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and start ports 630, 631, 640, 67 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. Further, on the upper surface of the upper plate 17, a frame button 22 (FIG. 11A) and a selection switch 600 (see FIG. 11B) are provided. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (b), the selection switch 600 is a decision switch (a) for determining the selection of effects, the left switch 600b for instructing selection in the left direction, and for instructing selection in the upward direction. An upper switch 600c and a lower switch 600e for instructing selection of the right switch 600d downward for instructing selection in the right direction are configured.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of the jackpot or the predetermined reach, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In addition, with the pachinko machine where the ball is directly lent out to the upper tray 17 from the ball lending device etc without passing through the card unit, so-called cash machine, the ball operation unit 40 is unnecessary, but in this case, the ball operation unit 40 A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and a configuration in which the main control device 110 or another control device detects a game ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a, or a solenoid of the ball launch unit 112a. May be configured to detect that the game ball has been fired. In addition, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until processing such as RAM clear is executed.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of balls for nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a first start port 63 a, 2 The starting opening 63b, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The first start opening 630, the right first start opening 631, the second start opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. 13 is fixed from the front side with a wood screw or the like. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a start opening is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area). Further, the game area includes all areas where the game ball having passed through the return ball preventing member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 and the winning opening.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  On the right side of the game board 13, a first normal symbol start port 67a and a second normal symbol start port 67b are provided below the first normal symbol start port 67b. The first normal symbol start port 67a and the second normal symbol start port 67b are configured in the same shape, and are configured as a start port having a gate-type sensor that can detect the passage of a game ball. Yes. When a game ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b, a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the lottery performed for the game ball passing through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined.

  When the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, "o" and "x" After the symbols are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), a normal symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o" or "x") indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed (lit display). When a ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67 or the second normal symbol start port 67b while the variable symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is the same as the first normal symbol start port 67a. The second normal symbol start opening 67b is held up to a maximum of four times. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal symbol start port 67 (the first normal symbol start port 67b or the second normal symbol start port 67b) remains, the following While a lottery of a normal symbol is performed, the variable display according to the lottery is started.

  If it is determined that the normal symbol is won, the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed with a symbol “◯” indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been won. When the hit symbol is displayed, the first ordinary electric service 632 is activated. The first ordinary electric accessory 632 includes a left guide member 632a and a right guide member 632b, and the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b are spaced apart so that one game ball can pass left and right. Normally, it is maintained in the state of standing up. From the state in which the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b stand substantially vertically (in this embodiment, the left guide member 632a is 40 degrees counterclockwise and the right guide member 632b is 40 degrees clockwise). The game ball enters the second starting opening 640 by moving (that is, changing to the open state) and guiding the gaming ball to the second starting opening 640 by guiding the game ball to the second starting opening 640. Easy state (special state). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out, the symbol “x” indicating that the normal symbol lottery is out is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. At this time, the first ordinary electric symbol 632 is not operated, and the next fluctuation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is executed.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side top (the upper right of FIG. 2) of the game area A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a are balls that have been awarded to the first start port 630, the right start port 631, the second start port 640, the first normal symbol start port (through gate) 67a, and the second normal symbol start port (through gate) 67b. Among the above, the number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which variable display has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds in the jackpot and the error indication are also indicated by the corresponding lighting state.

  The 7-segment display 37 b is configured by two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. In the left 7-segment LED, the first special symbol indicating the determination (lottery) result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as the first lottery game) based on winning in the first start port 630 or the right start port 631 is variably displayed (dynamic Is displayed. Specifically, the variable display (in this embodiment, 7 segments) is determined until the variable time (dynamic display time) elapses, which is determined based on winning in the first start port 630 or the right first start port 631. After the middle segment blinks), it is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the determination result. When the determination result is out, the symbol "-" is displayed, which indicates the outset in which one central segment is lighted. On the other hand, when the determination result is a hit, a symbol different from the symbol indicating the detachment such as the symbols "3" and "7" corresponding to the hit is displayed.

  On the right 7-segment LED, a second special symbol indicating the result of lottery (second lottery game) determination (lottery) based on winning at the second start port 640 is displayed (dynamic display). Specifically, it is displayed until the variation time determined based on the winning at the second starting port 640 elapses, and is configured similarly to the first lottery game. The LEDs 37a are configured such that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors can indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

  In addition, the first special symbol indicating the determination (lottery) result of the first lottery game and the second special symbol indicating the determination (lottery) result of the second lottery game are the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. (See). Thereby, since the 3rd symbol display device 81 can perform various variable displays as compared with the 7-segment display 37b, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Moreover, although the fluctuation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, a variation time is set for each variation mode, and corresponds to a dynamic display mode related to time information. Furthermore, the variation pattern can be divided into a long variation pattern with a relatively long variation time and a short variation pattern with a relatively short variation time by a variation pattern that becomes reach and a variation pattern that does not reach. As described above, even when the time is roughly sorted according to a constant reference (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds)), the dynamics related to the time information Corresponds to the display mode.

  As will be described later, the time information until the fluctuation start time corresponds to the time when the fluctuation starts accurately, and the time information of the rough fluctuation pattern described above (for example, whether it is a long-time fluctuation pattern). Information on time information (for example, the number of long-term fluctuation patterns performed until the start of fluctuation, etc.) determined based on whether or not

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery (first lottery game, second lottery game) performed for winning the first start port 630, the right first start port 631, and the second start port 640, is a big hit? In addition to determining whether or not to win (hit a lottery), the jackpot type is also determined. The jackpot type determined here is the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special chart 1), jackpot A (15R jackpot probable jackpot), jackpot B (15R regular jackpot), jackpot E (15R regular jackpot (electric support) 3) are set (see FIGS. 16A to 16C). Here, the presence of electric support of jackpot E indicates that the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is easily set to a special state (open state). In jackpot E, after 15 rounds of jackpot game, the electric support state is set until the total number of first lottery games and second lottery games reaches 100.

  As the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special chart 2), two types of jackpot C (15R probability variation jackpot (with electric support)) and jackpot D (15R probability variation jackpot (without electric support)) are set (FIG. 16). (See (a) to (c)).

  Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the variable winning devices 65 are respectively disposed as winning devices operated in the open state during the big hit game. The variable winning device 65 is activated so that the first specified winning opening 65a is opened 15 times for a predetermined period or a predetermined number (10 balls in this embodiment) of gaming balls for jackpots A to E. .

  The configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 6. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 is combined with an opening forming member 65 b disposed so as to protrude to the front side of the game board 13 and a back side of the opening forming member 65 b to make the variable winning device 65 A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for lighting the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 The LED board 65d that is disposed, the back cover body 65e that holds the LED board 65d with the base member 65c, and the opening / closing door 65f1 for opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d are provided. The open / close unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, the back cover body 65e, and the flow path cover body A switching member 65h that protrudes into the flow path formed by 5g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i that is engaged with the switching member 65h, and a back surface that is disposed on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. The cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k that is fixed to the back surface side of the back cover body 65j and operates the link member 65i, and covers the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and is fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. And a fixing cover body 65m.

  FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 5C is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5 (b), the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a which is an opening through which game balls can enter. The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball passing through the opening is inclined to the lower left so that it is guided to the left in FIG. 5B. A bottom surface is formed. At the left end portion of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 formed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting winning of the game ball is disposed. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is in an open state in which a game ball can enter by an open / close door 65f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism that can be projected and retracted from the game board 13 side, and in an inaccessible state. It can be changed to a possible closed state (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the open / close door 65f1, and the game ball can roll on the upper part of the open / close door. Further, in the open state, the open / close door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the gaming ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the right first start opening 631 side. It is configured as follows. Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second starting port 640 while keeping the right-handed state even during the short-time game (including during the probability change game), and to the left-handed immediately after the big hit game The time and effort to change can be reduced. Therefore, the game can be performed more easily.

  Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be won in the specific winning opening 65a efficiently. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 5 (a) is a cross-sectional view of La-La shown in FIG. 5 (b). As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined to the distribution flow path side of the back cover 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 to be described later.

  FIG. 6 (a) is a rear view of the back cover 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is actuated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge opening 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is pivotally supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is possible to arrange as possible.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally to the left and is guided to the special discharge port 65e2. . The game ball that has passed through the special outlet 65e2 is detected by a probability change switch 65e3 that is configured by a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special outlet 65e2, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. .

  Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the game ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 described above during the big hit game, so that the gaming state after the big hit game is the high probability gaming state Gaming state). That is, the probability variation switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability variation gaming state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the gaming state after the big hit to the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state ST1) or the probability variation gaming state.

  In this way, since the gaming state set after the jackpot game is changed by the flow route of the game ball that won the first specific winning port 65a during the jackpot game, the player's interest is improved even during the jackpot game. Can. The time required to pass from the opening of the first variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be 1 second at the shortest. . The operation timing and operation time of the switching member 65h are set according to the jackpot type. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A, jackpot C, jackpot D is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 14th round. It is done. When the jackpot B or jackpot E is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 14th round.

  Therefore, in the jackpot A, the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass the probability change switch 65e3, but in the jackpot B, it is impossible to pass the probability change switch 65e3 It is done. Therefore, the probability variation grant ratio can be controlled according to the jackpot type, and it can be configured so that an excessive advantage or disadvantage does not occur.

  A case where the gaming ball is guided to the normal discharge port 65e2 will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (b). FIG. 6B is a view showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is not operating and the opening piece of the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 is blocked by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h.

  The gaming balls guided to the distribution flow path from the detection port 65a1 are guided to the upper surface of the induction piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and guided to the normal discharge port 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge port 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 formed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is provided. As a result, it can be determined by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability change switch 65e3 whether all the game balls entered into the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem of winning in the 14th round in a state where the gaming ball that has won the 14th round is not discharged and winning in the probability change switch 65e3 even if it is the big hit B.

  In this way, the game ball that has won the first specific prize opening 65a in the first variable prize winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, a prize ball (in this embodiment, one ball win) is given to the player as a privilege. 15 prize balls can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass to the probability change switch 65e3, so that a lottery to determine whether or not to give a probability change game state can also be executed. . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for giving the probability variation gaming state separately from the first variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7, various gaming states in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 7A is a diagram illustrating a flow in which various game states are set. FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a jackpot type that occurs for each special symbol and a gaming state that shifts after the jackpot occurs in various gaming states.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7A, the following four gaming states are set as the gaming state. The first is a normal gaming state ST1. 2 in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a low probability (normal) and there is no electric support (the first ordinary electric character 632 is unlikely to be in the special state (open state)) gaming state. The third is the game state with electric support (the first ordinary electric character 632 is likely to be in the special state (open state)) although the jackpot probability of the special symbol is low (normal) as in the normal gaming state ST1. Time short game state ST1h. Third, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a high probability, there is no power support (the first normal motorized role 632 is unlikely to be a special state (open state)) gaming state certainly substation support non-playing state (so-called, Latency probability variation gaming state) ST 2. The fourth is a gaming state with a jackpot probability of the special symbol is a high probability, and also with the power support (the first ordinary electric character 632 is likely to be in a special state (open state)) There is a certain substation support gaming state (so-called, probability variation gaming state) ST3.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol. However, in each gaming state, one of the special symbol variations is substantially performed (also referred to as a substantial variation target). Specifically, the variation time of the special symbol that is not subject to substantial variation is configured to be longer than the variation time of the special symbol that is subject to substantial variation. In addition, the game state is hard to enter the game ball into the starting opening for lottery of special symbols that are not subject to substantial fluctuation, or the game ball enters the starting opening for performing lottery for special symbols that are subject to substantial fluctuation It is configured to be in a gaming state that is easy to play. As a result, the jackpot of the special symbol that is not subject to substantial fluctuation is not substantially generated (it is difficult to occur), and the jackpot of the special symbol that is subject to the substantial fluctuation can be substantially generated (facilitated).

  In addition, the method which makes any one special symbol a variation target substantially is not restricted to the method mentioned above. For example, a normal electric accessory is provided at each of a start opening serving as a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol and a start opening serving as a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol. Then, in each gaming state, it is conceivable to move (or easily) only the ordinary electric accessory at the start port corresponding to the special symbol to be substantially changed. As a result, the gaming ball enters the starting opening corresponding to the special symbol that is the subject of substantial fluctuation, and the gaming ball does not enter the starting opening corresponding to the special symbol that is not the subject of substantial fluctuation (it is difficult to enter the ball) You can In this case, it is possible to separately perform lottery for moving the ordinary motorized combination provided in each starting opening. For example, a lottery for moving one ordinary motorized symbol is performed based on entering (passing) the first ordinary symbol starting port (referred to as a first ordinary symbol lottery), and the other ordinary motorized symbol is movable. The lottery may be performed by entering (passing) the second normal symbol start opening (referred to as a second normal symbol lottery). Furthermore, the lottery of the first ordinary symbol and the lottery of the second ordinary symbol may be simultaneously performed, and in the same manner as the lottery of the special symbol in this embodiment, when the lottery of one ordinary symbol is a big hit The other normal symbol may be out of lottery. As a result, the variation of the gaming state can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the probability that the jackpot that allows the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is different between the jackpot based on the first special symbol and the jackpot based on the second special symbol. That is, the probability of being able to shift (loop) to the high probability gaming state (the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 or the probability variation gaming state ST3) is different. Specifically, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 16, the jackpot based on the first special symbol has a low probability of being able to shift (loop) to a high-probability gaming state (latent probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3) ( 34%), that is, there is a high probability (66%) of shifting (falling) to a low probability state (normal gaming state ST1 or short-time gaming state ST1h). On the other hand, the jackpot based on the second special symbol has a high probability (100%) of being able to shift (loop) to a high probability gaming state (latent probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3). In the following, for explaining the flow of setting various gaming states, for the sake of convenience, a jackpot that allows transition to a high-probability gaming state (a gaming ball can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3) has been selected (occurred). In this case, it is assumed that the game state shifts to the high probability gaming state (the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3).

  In each gaming state, it is possible to adjust (set) whether it is easy to shift (loop) to the high probability gaming state or to shift (fall) to the low probability state by setting the special symbol to be substantially changed. Thereby, in each gaming state, in addition to the state of two types (high probability, low probability) as the probability that the lottery result will be a big hit, two types (probability) to shift (loop) to high probability gaming state after big hit It is possible to set a state of high probability and low probability of transition to a high probability gaming state. Therefore, the variation of a game state can be increased and the interest of a player can be improved.

  Specifically, in the probability variation gaming state ST3 which is the high probability gaming state, by setting the substantial fluctuation target to the special figure 1, it is made the gaming state which is easy to shift to the low probability state (falling) and is also the high probability gaming state In the latent probability changing game state ST2, by setting the substantial change target in FIG. 2, it becomes possible to make the game state easy to shift (loop) to the high probability game state. That is, even if the same high probability gaming state (or low probability state), it is possible to change the distribution of the gaming state to shift after the end of the jackpot game by changing the special symbol that is subject to substantial fluctuation, It is possible to increase the variation of the game state transition, and to improve the player's interest.

  Returning to FIG. First, in a state where the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (a state where the RAM clear switch is pressed and the power is turned on), the normal gaming state ST1 is set. In the normal gaming state ST1, the first special symbol is substantially subject to variation. That is, it is a gaming state where the probability (probability change ratio) of occurrence of a jackpot to shift to the high probability gaming state is low (34%). Specifically, a variation time of 8000 ms (8 seconds) to 30000 ms (30 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) (see FIG. 17). In the jackpot of the first special symbol, the jackpot A (15R probability variable jackpot) that shifts to the high probability gaming state is selected with a probability of 34% as the jackpot type, and the jackpot B (15R normal jackpot) that remains in the low probability state Is selected with a probability of 66% (see FIG. 7 (b), FIG. 16).

  On the other hand, in the normal gaming state ST1, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (special figure 2) which is not a substantial fluctuation target is set long. Specifically, in the case where the result of the pass / fail judgment (lottery determination) is out, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is selected to be 64800000 ms (18 hours) (see FIG. 17). Therefore, it becomes possible to perform 2160 to 8200 lotterys in the first special symbol while the second special symbol is subjected to one out-of-out fluctuation. Since the jackpot probability in the normal gaming state ST1 (low probability state) is 1/400, the jackpot in the first special symbol by the time the second special symbol of the out of the normal special variation is finished once in the normal game It is configured to occur. In addition, since the operating hours of the game arcade are mainly about 15 hours from 9 am to 11 at night, they are set to be longer than that. Therefore, in the normal gaming state ST1, even if the second lottery game is executed, the outlier fluctuation of the special view 2 does not end within business hours. By configuring in this manner, in the normal gaming state ST1, a jackpot of the first special symbol (special figure 1) that is a subject of substantial fluctuation is generated (it is easy to do).

  If the second lottery game is executed, and the result of the determination of the success or failure does not fall out and it becomes a win, 600000 ms (10 minutes) of the variation time of the special figure 2 is selected (see FIG. 17). Although this will be specifically described later, if the variation based on the jackpot is started with one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation based on the other special symbol is out. In order to be controlled. If 64.800000 ms (18 hours) is selected as the fluctuation time when the success / failure determination result of Special Figure 2 is a hit, the fluctuation based on the jackpot of Special Figure 2 does not end within business hours. Therefore, there is a problem that all the fluctuations (the first lottery game) based on the special figure 1 executed during business hours are controlled so as not to come off (do not become a big hit). Therefore, the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the special figure 2 is the time (10 minutes) that can be finished within business hours. This solves the above-mentioned problem.

  However, if the variation based on the jackpot of the special figure 2 is short (for example, 500 ms (0.5 seconds)), the player can determine the success / failure determination result of the special figure 2 in a short time. There is a risk that an action will be performed. For example, the game ball is caused to enter the second starting opening 640, and it is determined that the result of the judgment of the special view 2 based on the entering ball is out (the variable display of the special view 2 is executed for longer than 0.5 seconds) C), there is a possibility that a fraudulent act (so-called reset got) of resetting (initializing) the pachinko machine 10 may be performed. As described above, when the RAM clear switch of the pachinko machine 10 is pressed and the power is turned on (reset), the normal gaming state ST1 is set, and the fluctuation of each special symbol is also initialized (that is, the fluctuation is stopped) Will be Therefore, it is possible to generate a jackpot based on the special figure 2 which is not a subject of substantial fluctuation by repeating the above-mentioned fraudulent act (reset goto). Therefore, in the present embodiment, by setting the change based on the jackpot of the special figure 2 to 10 minutes, it is possible for the player not to be able to determine the success / failure determination (lottery) result of the special figure 2 in a short time. As a result, since a period of at least 10 minutes is required to execute the above-mentioned fraudulent action (reset goto), it is possible to lower the executable frequency of the above-mentioned fraudulent action (reset goto). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the jackpot of the special figure 2 to be illegally generated by the above-mentioned fraudulent action (reset goto).

  In addition, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is not restricted to what was mentioned above, You may change suitably. For example, in a gaming machine that can not execute the second lottery game unless the game ball is intentionally fired (for example, right-handed game), the right-handed game is performed in the normal gaming state ST1 (for second lottery game) As a penalty, the variation time based on the jackpot of FIG. 2 may be set to a time (for example, 1 hour) longer than 600000 ms (10 minutes). Further, in this case, it may be notified that the cheating (right-handed game in the normal gaming state ST1) is being executed (or has been executed).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the second start port 640 is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80. Therefore, in order to cause the game ball to enter the second start opening 640 (to perform a second lottery game), it is necessary to perform a game (right-handed game) in which the right side of the variable display unit 80 is passed. In the normal gaming state ST1, the motorized prize 632 provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 is configured to be hard to be set in the special state (open state) (that is, difficult to enter the right first start opening 631). Therefore, when the right-handed game is played in the normal gaming state ST1, it is difficult to execute the first lottery game according to the special figure 1 which is substantially changed, and the second lottery game according to the special figure 2 which is not substantially changed is easily performed become. That is, the right-handed game in the normal gaming state ST1 is set to be more disadvantageous to the player than playing a game (left-handed game) by passing the game ball on the left side of the variable display unit 80. Therefore, in the normal gaming state ST1, the player plays the left hitting game. In the normal gaming state ST1, when a left-handed game is performed, the game ball does not enter the second start opening 640, and the game ball enters the first start opening 630. As a result, the jackpot of the second special symbol does not occur (it is difficult to do), and the jackpot of the first special symbol occurs (it is easy to do) the gaming state (that is, the gaming state where it is difficult to shift to the high probability gaming state) Can do.

  After the jackpot B occurs in the normal gaming state ST1 and the jackpot game of the jackpot B is executed, the normal gaming state ST1 is set (transitioned to). On the other hand, after the jackpot A occurs and the jackpot game is executed, the latent probability change gaming state ST2 is set (transitioned to) (see FIG. 7B). However, when the gaming ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 after the jackpot game based on the jackpot A is executed, the normal gaming state ST1 is set (shifted to).

  The latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is a gaming state in which the jackpot probability is set to be 10 times as high as that of the normal gaming state ST1 (in the high probability gaming state), and is a gaming state in which the second special symbol is substantially subject to fluctuation. That is, the gaming state has a high probability (probability change rate) that a jackpot capable of continuing the high probability gaming state is generated. Specifically, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 500 ms (0.5 seconds). Thereby, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the second lottery game can be efficiently performed by performing the right-handed game. And in the jackpot of the second special symbol as a jackpot type, jackpot C (15R probability variation jackpot) in which the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is continued (looped) is selected with a probability of 66%, and the jackpot transitioned to probability variation gaming state ST3 D (15R probability variation jackpot) is selected with a probability of 34%.

  On the other hand, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the variation time of the first special symbol that is not a substantial variation target is set to be long. Specifically, when the result of the first special symbol determination (lottery) is out of the range, 180000 ms (30 minutes) is selected as the variation time (see FIG. 18A). Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery of a maximum of 3600 times in the second special symbol while the first special symbol is deviated once. Since the jackpot probability in the probability change (high probability gaming state) is 1/40, in the case of a normal game, the first special symbol out of play will be a big hit with the second special symbol by one change end It is configured to be able to. On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol is a win, 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation time (see FIG. 18A). In the latent probability change gaming state ST2, when the pachinko machine 10 is reset (initialized), the transition to the normal gaming state ST1 is made, so that the above-mentioned fraudulent act (reset goto) can not be executed. Therefore, when the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation time is set as short as 500 ms (0.5 seconds). As a result, even when a jackpot occurs in the first special symbol in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, it is possible to make the gaming machine capable of continuing the game without reducing the efficiency (rotational rate) of the gaming.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the lottery result of the second special symbol is configured to be a small hit with a probability of 8/400. In the small hit in the latent probability changing game state ST2, about 3 game balls can enter the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65. Since the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry to the specific winning opening 65a is 15, about 45 balls are paid out to the player for each small hit game. As a result, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the right-handed game can be executed in an advantageous state (a state where consumption of the holding ball is suppressed) compared to the normal game state ST1.

  In the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is selected and the jackpot D (15R probability variation large jackpot) is selected, the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is set again (looped). On the other hand, when the jackpot C (15R probability variation jackpot) is selected, a gaming state with probability transformation support (probability gaming state ST3) is set thereafter.

  The probability variation gaming state ST3 is a gaming state in which the lottery probability of the special symbol is set 10 times higher (set to the high probability gaming state), and the first special symbol is a variation target gaming state. Furthermore, the lottery probability of the normal symbol is also set 40 times higher, and the variation time of the normal symbol also tends to be selected with a shorter variation time (see FIG. 19). In addition, the time (opening time) in which the motorized role product 632 is maintained in the special state (open state) is also set longer than in the normal gaming state ST1 and the latent probability changing gaming state ST2. Therefore, when the player strikes right, the right first start port 631 can be easily won. In the present embodiment, 95% of the right-handed game balls are configured to win a prize in the first right start opening 631. Therefore, 85% of the remaining 5% of the game balls win the second starting hole 640, and the remaining 5% of the game balls are consumed as the out ball. Therefore, in the probability change gaming state, about 99% of the right-handed game balls will be awarded to the right first start hole 631 or the second start hole 640, and 99% of the right-handed game balls are played as a prize ball Paid out to the person. Therefore, it is possible to play a game while suppressing a decrease in the player's ball.

  In the probability variation gaming state ST3, as a lottery result of the second special symbol is configured to be a small hit with a probability of 5/400. In the small hit in the probability variation gaming state ST3, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. Thereby, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, it can be prevented (suppressed) that it becomes too advantageous for the player. The present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball may enter the specific winning opening 65a (for example, one ball). Thereby, the privilege for the player can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the probability variation gaming state ST3, the variation time of the second special symbol which is not a substantial variation target is set long, and the variation time of the first special symbol which is a substantial variation target is set short. Specifically, 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol regardless of the result of the judgment (lottery determination) (see FIG. 18B). On the other hand, when the result of the determination (lottery determination) is out of the variation time of the first special symbol, the variation time of 1800000 ms (30 minutes) is selected (see FIG. 18B). Therefore, it is possible to perform a maximum of 3600 lotterys in the first special symbol while the second special symbol is subjected to one out-of-out variation. The jackpot probability during probability change (high probability gaming state) is 1/40, so if it is a normal game, the first special symbol will be a big hit before the second special symbol that has been missed changes once It is configured to be able to. On the other hand, if the result of the determination of the first special symbol (lottery) is a hit, a variation time of 5000 ms (5 seconds) is selected (see FIG. 18B). As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is reset (initialized), it shifts to the normal gaming state ST1, so that the above-mentioned fraudulent act (reset goto) can not be executed. Therefore, when it becomes a big hit with the second special symbol in the probability variation gaming state ST3, the fluctuation time is set as short as 5000 ms (5 seconds). Thereby, even when a big win occurs in the second special symbol in the probability variation gaming state ST3, it is possible to make the gaming machine capable of continuing the game without reducing the efficiency (rotation rate) of the game.

  Further, as described above, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, 95% of the fired game balls win a prize in the right first start opening 631. Therefore, since it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting opening 640 and the second lottery game is difficult to be performed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the jackpot of the second special symbol that is not a substantial change target.

  If it becomes a jackpot of the first special symbol in the probability variation gaming state ST3, jackpot A is selected at a rate of 34%. After the jackpot game based on the jackpot A, the latent probability change gaming state ST2 is set (transitioned to). Therefore, the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is selected (transitioned to) with a probability of 34%, and it is possible to play a game with a high probability until at least two jackpots are won again. On the other hand, when the jackpot B is selected with a probability of 66%, the normal gaming state ST1 is set (so-called, falling) after the jackpot game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is set, until the jackpot is executed twice in a state in which the consumption of the holding balls is suppressed, the first probability is high for the player. 2 lottery game (or first lottery game) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player can execute two big hit games in a short time as compared with the normal game state, and it is possible to provide the player with a sense of superiority.

  Furthermore, by displaying so that the player can grasp that the lottery game will be executed with a high probability advantageous to the player until the jackpot is executed twice, the player can receive at least two jackpots. It has the effect of being able to make it feel secure and providing a sense of security.

  In the present embodiment, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, when the big special bonus B of the first special symbol is reached, the normal game state ST1 is set (shifted to). That is, two jackpots can not be obtained. In the latent probability changing game state ST2, as described above, a right-handed game in which the first lottery game is difficult to be executed is performed, and the second lottery is performed during the fluctuation of the first special symbol that changes for a long time. The game is executed a plurality of times, and the jackpot of the second special symbol is generated (easily) (substantially not the jackpot of the first special symbol). However, there may be a big hit of the first special symbol due to the holding ball of the first special symbol stored in the latent probability changing game state ST2. For example, when becoming a big hit in the first second lottery game in which the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is set (probability of 1/40), etc. Therefore, in this case, in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, the jackpot A is selected with a probability of 34% as the jackpot of the first special symbol, and the jackpot E is selected with a probability of 66% ( 7 (b) and 16 (b)). If the jackpot A is selected, the game proceeds to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 which is a high probability gaming state, so that two jackpots can be obtained. On the other hand, when the jackpot E is selected, two jackpots can not be obtained, and a transition to a low probability state is made. In this case, 100 short-time games are awarded after the jackpot game ends. As a result, a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state ST1 is configured. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a defect that the player is disappointed and the motivation to the game is significantly reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 by using winnings (start winnings) to the first starting opening 630, the right first starting opening 631, and the second starting opening 640 as a trigger. A third symbol display device 81 constituted by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") for performing variable display of the third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is provided.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch large liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. Left (left display area Dm1), middle (middle display area Dm2), and right showing the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) or the second special symbol (Special Figure 2) which is one of the third symbols in the area Dm Three symbol columns in the (right side display area Dm3) are displayed. The type of the third symbol displayed in the first display area (Dm) (whether it is special figure 1 or special figure 2) is determined and displayed according to the gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the normal gaming state ST1 (low probability gaming state) and the probability transformation support existence gaming state (probability variation gaming state), the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the probability transformation support is In the absence gaming state (latency probability changing gaming state ST2), the second special symbol is set to be displayed in the first display area Dm.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the type of the special symbol displayed in the first display area Dm is set to be switched. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the same special symbol may be displayed at all times. Good.

  Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed on the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 It is supposed to be (dynamically displayed).

  In addition, the 3rd symbol (the 1st special symbol or the 2nd special symbol) displayed in the 1st display field Dm is respectively constituted by 10 kinds of special symbols attached with the number of "0" to "9". . Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbol is aligned (for example, "777") variation display is performed, and the variation display Is configured to generate a jackpot after the end.

  Specifically, in the first display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 for left, middle and right are displayed. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform variable display.

  In the first display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. If the third symbol is stopped together with a combination of jackpot symbols on the active line (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination), the jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

  A second display area Dn and a second sub display area Dt are formed below the second display area Dn at the upper right of the first display area Dm. In the second display area Dn, a symbol row indicating the first special symbol or the second special symbol (depending on the gaming state) is displayed. In the second sub display area Dt, a symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (which varies depending on the gaming state) displayed in the second display region Dn is displayed. Although the details will be described later, in the case of the probability variation gaming state ST3, as shown in FIGS. Displayed on Dn. Then, when the variation of the second special symbol is started, a blinking display is performed in which the state of FIG. 9A and the state of FIG. 9B are alternately repeated with a short cycle (for example, 1 second). . Then, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of place, when the fluctuation time has elapsed, the lottery result is stopped and displayed in the state shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the lottery result is a win, the display is stopped and displayed in the state shown in FIG.

  In addition, a third display area Du is formed on the upper left of the first display area Dm. In this third display area Du, two types of symbol rows of "o" and "x" as shown in FIG. 8B are displayed in parallel in two rows, and the left symbol is a lottery of the first special symbol The result is shown, and the symbol on the right side is configured to show the lottery result of the second special symbol. In addition, you may make it show not only this but the lottery result of a 1st special symbol or a 2nd special symbol by another aspect. For example, when two types of symbol rows of “o” and “x” are displayed side by side in two rows and two “o” symbols are displayed in left and right rows, the first special symbol or the second special symbol (game It may be configured to notify that it has been a hit). Also, the third display area Du and the second display area Dn may be shared. For example, in the normal gaming state ST1, two symbol rows of "o" and "x" are displayed side by side in the second display area, and in the probability variation gaming state ST3, as shown in FIGS. As shown in), the symbol of the treasure box may be displayed in the second display area Dn as a third symbol indicating a second special symbol. In this case, the display area may be switched based on the switching of the gaming state after the jackpot game. As a result, the display area of the first display area Dm can be widened, so that the effects of the effects displayed in the first display area Dm can be enhanced. Further, when the change based on the second special symbol is not executed (when there is no suspension of the special figure 2), the second display area Dn and the second sub display area Dt may not be displayed. Thereby, the display area of the first display area Dm can be widened.

  Furthermore, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. If the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing at the same time, and one is stopped and displayed in a mode that indicates a big hit (or a small hit), the variation of the other special symbol in change is also forced. It is configured to be stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates detachment.

  Here, the opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is performed 15 times (called 15 rounds) in the jackpot, while the opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is in the small hitting. It is performed twice (for example, 2 rounds). Further, one round of the jackpot game is executed until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 game balls win the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, one round of the small hit game in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is set until 1.8 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls of the game balls win the variable winning device 65. Therefore, in the small hit game in the latent probability variation game state ST2, about 3 game balls can enter. In addition, one round of the small hit game in the probability variation game state ST3 is set until 0.5 seconds elapses or 10 game balls are won in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, in the small hitting game in the probability variation gaming state ST3, it is almost impossible to cause the variable winning device 65 to enter the gaming ball, and it is difficult to obtain a winning ball.

  Also in the probability variation gaming state ST3, as described above, when it is stopped and displayed in the lottery result showing a small hit in the first special symbol, the second special symbol in the fluctuation is a symbol forcibly showing a detachment (FIG. 9 (FIG. 9) (See (a)). In this case, after the out-of-point variation of the second special symbol not subject to the substantial variation, which is a long-term (10 minutes) variation, is stopped and the small hitting game of the special figure 1 ends, the new variation of the special figure 1 At the same time, a second lottery game is executed based on the new hold (next hold) ball of the second special symbol. That is, a jackpot based on the second special symbol may occur. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot in the second lottery game in the second special symbol, the jackpot C (15R probability variation jackpot) that can be transferred to the high probability gaming state is always selected (100%) It is configured (see FIG. 16C), which is advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the change is started based on the new hold (next hold) of the second special symbol, as shown in FIGS. The variation of the symbol is displayed, and the variation of the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm. Similarly, a symbol indicating the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the second sub-display area Dt, and a symbol indicating the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. . In addition, as a mode which is changed, it is not restricted to this, the display area of the 2nd display area Dn in which the change of the 2nd special symbol is displayed is expanded, and the 1st display in which the change of the 1st special symbol is displayed The area Dm may be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, when the variation of the second special symbol is changed so as to be displayed in the first display area Dm, the display mode in which the treasure box is opened is executed, and when the result of determination of acceptance is out. The character "Sorry" is displayed from the inside of the treasure box, and it is displayed to the player that the lottery result is out. On the other hand, if the result of the determination is a hit, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), the letter "Congratulations" is displayed from the inside of the treasure box, and it is displayed that the player has won the lottery result. The

  In this manner, when the first special symbol is won in a small hit in the probability variation gaming state ST3, the variation of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, and the variation of the new second special symbol is started. 2) It is possible to increase the opportunity for the lottery game to be executed. Furthermore, in that case, as shown in FIGS. 10A to 10B, the variation based on the second special symbol is emphasized and displayed, so the player is expected to hit the jackpot with the second special symbol. It can be done.

  In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, the sub display area Ds is formed below the first display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, as shown in FIG. 8B, a reserved symbol “black circle” corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. On the other hand, a second sub display area Dt is formed below the second display area Dn. In the second sub display area Dt, as shown in FIG. 9A, a reserved symbol “black triangle mark” corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. In this embodiment, since the number of holding balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to four each, a maximum of four holding symbols “black circle” are displayed in the sub-table display area Ds. In the second sub display area Dt, a maximum of four reserved symbols "black triangles" are displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol is displayed as a “black circle”, and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is distinguished as a “black triangle”. In addition, it is good also not only as this but as the retention symbol of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, being the same. By using the same reserved symbol for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the capacity of the symbol data can be reduced. Furthermore, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol may be displayed in the sub display area Ds. For example, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol may be displayed in the left area of the sub display area Ds, and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol may be displayed in the right area, or the variation starts from the left side of the display area. You may display so that a pending | holding symbol may line up in order.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 composed of the first lottery game and the second lottery game has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or four or more lottery games and corresponding start Naturally, it is also possible to provide a mouth and configure variable display of each lottery result at the same time.

  When a game ball wins the first start port 630, the right first start port 631, and the second start port 640, a first start port switch or a second start port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is provided. Turn on. The first start port 630 and the right first start port 631 are formed on the back side of the game board 13 with a common guide path through which the game balls entered are guided to the first start port switch. The main control device 110 makes a lottery lottery due to the first start port switch and the second start port switch being turned on, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first start port 630, the right first start port 631, and the second start port 640 are also one of the winning ports from which one ball is paid out as a winning ball when a ball is won.

  When either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the jackpot, the variation display based on the other special symbol is forcibly terminated. In the present embodiment, when a variation in which the determination result is a big hit is started in one special symbol, the special symbol that starts to vary after the other symbol is forcibly changed as a lottery result. Is configured to start. Thereby, the malfunction that a jackpot game is started continuously or a jackpot game is started simultaneously can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, when the winning lottery game is executed with one special symbol, the other lottery game is forcibly executed on the other side. You may comprise so that the lottery game as a lottery result may be performed and a jackpot game may be started continuously. In addition, when it becomes big hit with either 1st special symbol and 2nd special symbol, measurement of fluctuation time is suspended in the other special symbol, as the constitution which continues the remaining fluctuation indication after the big hit Also good. In this case, during interruption, the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be blinked in a predetermined display mode "for example, alphabet h" in a predetermined cycle. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspended).

  In addition, a special symbol that preferentially executes variable display in each gaming state may be defined, and variable display of the special symbol may be preferentially executed. For example, in the normal gaming state ST1, the variation of the first special symbol is preferentially executed. In this case, the change of the second special symbol may be temporarily stopped (or forcibly stopped) based on the start of the execution of the change of the first special symbol. As a result, if the first special symbol has not changed, the second special symbol can be changed. However, when the first special symbol starts to change, the second special symbol changes temporarily (or Forced stop). Therefore, the variation of the first special symbol can be preferentially executed in the normal gaming state ST1.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided, and the certificate paper and the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is a front frame 14 Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. The ball which has not won any winning opening is guided to the ball discharging passage (not shown) through the out port 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 8) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3). ing. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the configuration>
With reference to FIG. 2, the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be further described in detail. In the present embodiment, a left flow passage PA1 in which gaming balls flow down on the left side of the variable display unit 80 and a right flow passage PA2 in flow down the right of the variable display unit 80 are formed. A first start port 630 is disposed below the center of the variable display unit 80. As described above, the gaming balls flowing down the right side channel PA2 are configured such that 85% of the flowing gaming balls enter the second starting opening 640 by the nail groups T2 and T3. Therefore, the first starting port 630 is configured such that the game ball flowing down the left channel PA1 is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down the right channel PA2.

  The first normal symbol starting port 67a is disposed in the right side flow path PA2, the variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first normal symbol starting port 67a, the first right starting port 631 is disposed below the variable winning device 65, and the second ordinary A symbol starting port 67b is disposed. A second start port 640 is disposed below the right first start port 631. The game board 13 is provided with a plurality of nails T for changing the rolling direction of the game ball.

  In the normal state (with the left guiding member 632 a and the right guiding member 632 b standing up), the gaming ball fired in the right channel is the right one in the normal state (the state in which the left guiding member 632 a and the right guiding member 632 b are erected). The game ball is configured not to enter the starting opening 631. When the motorized accessory 632 is in the normal state, 85% of the gaming balls flowing down the right side flow path are configured to flow down the left side of the right side first starting opening 631. In addition, the ratio of the game ball which flows down the left side and the right side of the right 1st starting opening 631 is changeable by adjusting the angle (inclination) of nail T1. By inclining the angle of the nail T1 toward the variable winning device 65 side (opposite to the nail group T4), the width between the nail T1 and the nail group T4 is increased, and the nail T1 flows down between the nail T1 and the nail group T4. That is, the rate at which game balls flow down the right side of the right first starting port 631 increases. On the other hand, by inclining the nail T1 to the right first start opening 631 side (the nail group T4 side), the width of the nail T1 and the nail group T4 becomes narrow, and the gaming ball flows down the right side of the right first start opening 631 By reducing the ratio, it is possible to increase the ratio of gaming balls flowing down the left side of the first right starting opening 631.

  The gaming ball that has flowed down the left side of the right first starting opening 631 is configured to be guided to the second starting opening 640 by a nail group T3 (consisting of five nails). The nail group T3 is arranged such that the width of each nail is narrower than that of one game ball, and the game ball can not pass through (width) therebetween. The game balls guided to the nail group T3 are prevented from flowing down below the second start port 640 by the nail group T2 (consisting of three nails), and all enter the second start port 640. It is configured. The present invention is not limited to this, and some gaming balls may naturally flow downward from the nail group T3 side (or the nail group T2 side or both).

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the second starting opening 640, it is set such that one winning ball is paid out to the player. Since 85% of the gaming balls fired to the right channel PA2 are configured to win a prize in the second starting opening 640 (when the electrically operated part 632 is in the normal state), the gaming balls fired by the player Of these, 85% are configured to be refunded as prize balls. Therefore, the player can suppress the consumption (reduction) of the gaming ball as a holding ball by firing the gaming ball in the right side channel PA2 rather than firing the gaming ball in the left side channel. In the present embodiment, the gaming ball that has flowed down the right side of the right first start opening 631 does not win the second start opening 640 due to the nail group T2. Thus, by adjusting the nail T1, it is possible to adjust the ratio of gaming balls entering the second starting opening 640, that is, the ratio of being paid back as a winning ball in a right-handed game.

  Next, when the motorized part 632 is in a special state (a state in which the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b are turned substantially horizontal, the open state), the left guide member 632a causes the left side of the first right starting opening 631 The flow path flowing down is closed. As a result, when the motorized role product 632 is in the special state (open state), the game ball having flowed down the right side channel is configured to be prevented from winning in the second starting opening 640. Therefore, when it is in the time saving game state ST1 h or the probability variation game state ST3, the winning of the right first starting opening 631 increases, the winning of the second starting opening 640 decreases, and the first lottery game with the first special symbol The number of executions (execution frequency) is increased. Furthermore, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set long in the time saving game state ST1h and the probability variation gaming state ST3, the number of times of execution (execution frequency) of the second lottery game can be reduced (lowered).

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, since the variation time of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player is set short, the game is performed so as to fire the game ball in the right channel. As already described, since the ratio of the game balls winning the second start port 640 is set to 85% of the game balls flowing down the right channel, the player's balls will decrease. However, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is reached, the probability of winning a small hit with the second special symbol is set high. Further, the small hit game executed during the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set until the opening time of one round of the one variable winning device 65 is 1.8 seconds or 10 balls are won, and the opening time per round is other than that. Because it is extended than the small hit in the game state of, it is possible to obtain a winning ball by the small hit. In the present embodiment, the probability of hitting during the latent probability change is set to be 15% consumed by flowing down the right channel, and is configured to compensate for the decrease in the player's ball. It is done. Therefore, the player can play the game also in the latent probability change gaming state ST2 while suppressing the ball from decreasing.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state ST1, it is prohibited to play the game in the right-handed game (playing the gaming ball in the right channel PA2 and playing the game), and the second starting opening in the normal gaming state ST1. When the game ball wins in 640, an abnormal process is executed, and the alarm display "Please play left-handed game" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a similar warning is also notified by voice. Further, in the normal gaming state ST1, when the game ball is won in the second starting opening 640, it may be controlled so that the big hit becomes invalid, it is configured to output an abnormal signal to the hall computer etc. May be

  In the present embodiment, the game method (left-handed game or right-handed game) is changed in each game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Either left handed game or right handed game may be performed in all game states, or left handed game or right handed game may be performed in a specific game state. May be. For example, a starting port for a first special symbol and a starting port for a second special symbol are provided at the lower center of the game board 13. Then, by playing the left-handed game, the game ball flowing down the left channel PA1, and the right-handed game ball flowing through the right channel PA2 by performing the right-handed game have the first special symbol starting opening and the second It may be configured to be able to enter the starting opening of the special symbol. As a result, in all the gaming states or in the specific gaming state, it is not necessary to separate the left-handed game and the right-handed game, so that the game burden on the player can be reduced.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters etc. are MPU201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a big hit lottery, the setting of the display of the 1st symbol display 37 and the 3rd symbol display 81, the lottery of the display result of the 2nd symbol display 83, etc. Used in

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol And a variation type counter C3 used for selecting a variation pattern and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and some counters are not included in the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45). It is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second start opening 640 where the respective counter values are stored for winning on the first start opening 630 and the right first start opening 631. A second special symbol holding ball storage 203b is provided in which each counter value is stored. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four holding balls are provided at the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631, and a maximum of four holding balls are provided at the second starting port 640, respectively. Up to eight holding balls are configured to be storable. Therefore, when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable display, or when the special symbol such as when the jackpot of the special symbol is not being played, the gaming ball can play the game ball in the first starting opening 630 or the first right starting opening 631 When the player wins, each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and when the gaming ball wins in the second starting opening 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b . Thereafter, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a is moved to a first special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown), and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display). Various settings and control processes are performed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is moved to the second special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown), and various kinds of display for variably displaying the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b. Setting and control processing are performed.

  On the other hand, during the period when the special symbol lottery is not possible, such as during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, When winning at the right first start port 631 and the second start port 640, if the number of reserves for the winning start port is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired. , And stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning starting opening. In addition, when the number of reserves for the winning start opening is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value is not acquired and one prize ball (in this example, one game ball) is obtained. Only) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of holding balls is four for the first start port 630 and the right first start port 631 in total and four for the second start port 640, but is limited thereto Alternatively, four may be provided, or the upper limit may not be provided.

  Each counter shown in FIG. 9 will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. Note that the first random number counter C1 is acquired in common for each of the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631 and the second starting port 640.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the ball is the first starting opening 630, the first right starting opening 631, the second starting opening It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning starting opening of the RAM 203 at the timing of winning (start winning) at 640. The value of the random number to be the jackpot is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 14) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table When it matches with the value of the jackpot random number set by 202a (in the present embodiment, “7” at low probability, and “0 to 9 at high probability”), it is determined to be a jackpot.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (round value) that will be the big win is 1 at low probability, and its value "7" is 10 at high probability, its value "0 to 9", It is stored in the first random number table 202a.

  The first hit type counter C2 is for determining the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is sequentially incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (99 in the present embodiment) After reaching), it is configured to return to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the ball is the first start opening 630, the right first start opening 631, the second start It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 corresponding to the winning start opening at the timing when the opening 640 is won (start winning). Note that the timing at which the value of the first random number counter C1 is acquired is actually the timing at which the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch (not shown) or the second starting opening switch (not shown) That is.

  Here, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, a random number that is out of place. If there is, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") become those at the time of deviation. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203b is a random number that is a big hit, The stop type is that of the big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and the stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16) stored in the ROM 202.

  As the jackpot type, as described above, the jackpot A, jackpot B and jackpot E are set as the jackpot type dedicated to the first special symbol, and the jackpot C and jackpot D are set as the jackpot type dedicated to the second special symbol Has been. The jackpot A to jackpot E are each composed of 15 rounds of jackpot games. Further, in the big hit A, big hit C, and big hit D, the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is rotated for 5 seconds at the start of the 14th round, and the gaming ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. When the game ball is detected by the probability change switch 65e3, the game state after the big hit game is set to a probability change game state ST3 or a latent probability change game state ST2 in which the game state is a high probability game state.

  In addition, as a method of making the gaming ball passable to the probability change switch 65e3, the method is not limited to the above-described method. For example, a game ball that has entered a ball can pass the probability change switch 65e3 (provided with a probability change switch 65e3), and a game ball that has entered a ball can not pass the probability change switch 65e3 (a probability change switch 65e3 Is provided) and a non-V variable winning device 652 is provided. And in the big hit that enables the game state after the big hit game to be transferred to the high probability game state, the V variable winning device 651 is controlled to be opened and closed, and the game state after the big hit game can not be transferred to the high probability game state In the jackpot, the V variable winning device 651 is not opened and closed, and the non-V variable winning device 652 is opened and closed. Further, the V-variable winning device 651 may be provided with a switching member 65h as in the present embodiment. Then, the switching member 65h is moved at a specific timing (for example, at the start of the 14th round) so that the game ball can pass to the probability variation switch 65e3. And in the big hit that enables the game state after the big hit game to be shifted to the high probability gaming state, the V variable winning device 651 is controlled to be opened and closed in the 14th round, and the gaming state after the big hit game is high probability gaming state In the jackpot that makes the transition impossible, the non-V variable winning device 652 is controlled to open and close in the 14th round. Thereby, since it is not necessary to change the control of the probability variation switch 65e3 for each jackpot type, it is possible to reduce the design cost and the program capacity.

  On the other hand, in the case of big hit B and big hit E, the switching member 65h is rotated only for 0.5 seconds at the start of the 14th round. It takes 0.5 seconds or more for the game ball winning the variable winning device 65 to reach the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, when the big hit B and the big hit E, the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. The gaming state after the jackpot is configured not to be set to a highly probable gaming state. In the case of jackpot B and jackpot E that are not shifted to the high probability gaming state after the jackpot game, the switching member 65h may not be rotated. Thereby, in the big hit B and the big hit E, it is possible to surely prevent the game ball from passing to the probability variation switch 65e3, and it is not necessary to rotate the switching member 65h, so that the power consumption can be reduced.

  Therefore, even if the jackpot game is started, since it is determined whether or not the probability change is given during the subsequent jackpot game, it is possible to keep expectation for the probability change for a long time. Furthermore, since the proportion of probability change given to the first special symbol is different from that of the second special symbol, the player can play a game by changing the expectation level where the probability change is given depending on the difference of the special symbol.

  As shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C, the jackpot type selection table 202d is composed of three types of tables, the jackpot type selection tables A to C. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table A. FIG. This jackpot type selection table A is used for determining the jackpot type based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the jackpot is reached in the normal gaming state ST1 (including the short-time gaming state ST1h). It is a selection table. As shown in FIG. 16 (a), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special chart 1), jackpot A (15R probability variable jackpot) and jackpot B (15R normal jackpot) are set. As the jackpot A, the first hit type counter C2 has a value of “0 to 33” set as the judgment value, and for the jackpot B, the first hit type counter C2 of “34 to 99” has the judgment value It is set as. As a jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), one kind of jackpot C is set, and the value of the first hit classification counter C2 of "0 to 99" is set as the judgment value. That is, in the normal gaming state ST1, the jackpot A is selected with a probability of 34% when the jackpot according to the special figure 1 is made, and the jackpot B is selected with a probability of 66%. On the other hand, the jackpot C is selected with a probability of 100% when the jackpot in FIG.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 16A, the jackpot A is a state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the operating time of the electric accessory 632 is set longer. It is a jackpot in which a V winning opening pattern is set in which the opening pattern in which the game ball can win a prize is given to the probability variation switch 65e3 of the variable winning device 65 without the support state) being given. On the other hand, the jackpot B is a jackpot in which the power support state is not given and the V winning opening pattern is not set. The jackpot C is set to a jackpot in which the power support state is given and the V winning opening pattern is set.

  As described above, in the normal gaming state ST1, it is assumed that the jackpot C of the second special symbol that is not normally played (fluctuated) is only the jackpot C, so that, for example, the jackpot occurs in the second special symbol due to fraud or the like. However, it is configured so as to suppress a problem that at least two jackpots are illegally given in the high probability gaming state without giving the latent probability changing gaming state ST2.

  Next, FIG. 16B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table B. As shown in FIG. This jackpot type selection table B is a table for determining the jackpot type when the jackpot is established in the latent probability changing game state ST2. In the jackpot type selection table B, a jackpot A and a jackpot E are set as the jackpot types of the special figure 1, and a jackpot C and a jackpot D are respectively set as the jackpot types of the special figure 2.

  The jackpot E is a short jackpot at the time of 15 rounds, and the electric support state is given until the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts to change 100 times after the jackpot game ends. The jackpot probability in this case is set to the low probability state. In addition, since the variation time of the special figure 1 is set longer when the game shifts to the latent probability changing game state ST2, the big hit is the first variation of the first special symbol that has shifted to the latent probability changed game state ST2. Is generally considered. In that case, there is an intention to rescue the player, and the jackpot E that is not selected in the normal gaming state ST1 is set to be selected instead of the jackpot B. Therefore, a player's discouragement can be suppressed and the malfunction which the motivation for a game falls remarkably can be suppressed.

  In the case of a big hit in the special figure 2, a big hit C and a big hit D are respectively set. The jackpot D is composed of a jackpot for which 15 rounds of latent probability variation are set. Here, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is set, the possibility that the lottery probability of the special symbol is set to the high probability gaming state is set high until at least two big hit games are executed. ing. Therefore, for the player, the jackpot type is set in which the jackpot D is more advantageous than the jackpot C for which the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set.

  In the jackpot type selection table B, the jackpot C is set with “0 to 65” as a determination value, and the jackpot D is set with “66 to 99” as a determination value. Therefore, the jackpot C is set to be selected with a probability of 66% when the second special symbol is won, and the jackpot D is selected with a probability of 34%. Therefore, the player plays the game in the expectation that the jackpot D is selected when the big special symbol is a big hit in the latent probability changing gaming state ST2.

  FIG. 16C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table C. The jackpot type selection table C is a selection table used to determine the jackpot type when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state ST3. In the jackpot type selection table C, jackpot A and jackpot B are set as jackpot types of the first special symbol, and only jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type of the second special symbol. The ratio at which the jackpot A is selected is set to 34% (determination value “0 to 33”), and the ratio at which the jackpot B is selected is set to 66% (determination value “34 to 99”). ).

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set, the jackpot D is always selected when the second special symbol is a big hit, so that the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is set, and the player is given at least two. The high-probability gaming state is configured to be easily set continuously until the jackpot is executed. Here, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be long, and further, the electric accessory 632 is set to easily enter the special state (open state) (electric support) ), The number of balls entering the second start port 640 is suppressed. As will be described later, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, 3000 ms is selected at a rate of 191/199 for a normal symbol change time, and 30000 ms is selected at a rate of 8/199 by lottery (see FIG. 19). Therefore, the change time of 30000 ms having a long change time is selected with a low probability.

  The electric accessory 632 is not operated in a special state (open state) until the fluctuation time of 30000 ms elapses. During that time, the game ball is likely to win the second start port 640 (right-handed). Since 85% of the gaming balls enter), it is possible to increase the holding balls of the second special symbol. On the other hand, during the probability variation gaming state ST3, in the case of disconnection as shown in FIG. 18 (b), the fluctuation time of 18.00000 ms is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, so usually the second special symbol It is configured such that a new lottery is not executed efficiently even in the state where the holding ball of is stored. However, during the probability variation gaming state ST3, the small hit probability of the first special symbol is set to 1/80 (see FIG. 15 (see b)), so every time the small symbol is won with the first special symbol, The variation executed in the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, and the variation of the stored ball that is stored next is started. That is, by winning a small hit with the first special symbol, the lottery opportunity with the second special symbol is increased, and it is set so that the lottery which is advantageous to the player can be easily executed. Therefore, the player can play a game in the hope of winning a small win with the first special symbol, and can increase the player's expectation in addition to the big win. Note that the small lottery probability may be set as an appropriate value as appropriate.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the explanation of the various counters will be continued. For example, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, reaches a maximum value (that is, 198), and then returns to 0.

  The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the ball is moved to the first start port 630, the right first start port 631 or the second start port 640. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing of winning (start winning).

  In the present embodiment, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is acquired at the timing when the start winning is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value may be acquired at the timing of the fluctuation start. Of course, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 may be selected at the start of fluctuation.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18A to 18B, the variation pattern selection table 202e is a variation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 17) for selecting a variation pattern in the low probability gaming state, and the latent probability variation game A variation pattern selection table B (see FIG. 18A) for selecting a variation pattern in the state ST2, a variation pattern selection table C for selecting a variation pattern in the probability variation gaming state ST3 or the short time gaming state ST1h (see FIG. b) See) is set.

  In each variation pattern selection table, the type of variation pattern is set corresponding to the number of holding balls at the start of variation, the value of the variation type selection counter CS1, and the result of the pass / fail determination. The type of fluctuation pattern determined by the main controller 110 is the rough contents of the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation time and the rough fluctuation type (non-reach, various types of reach) are mainly determined. The voice lamp control device 114 is configured to determine more detailed contents of the variation pattern. By configuring in this manner, the control load of main controller 110 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the normal gaming state ST1 is configured such that the success or failure judgment result is deviated as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and an extremely long fluctuation time (dynamic display time) is determined regardless of the win. It is done. Specifically, 64800000 ms is selected, and 18 hours are set. The business hours of a game arcade are generally 15 hours of business hours and are composed of longer fluctuation times, since it is general even when the morning is usually from 9:00 to 11:00. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a big hit by playing with the second special symbol in the normal gaming state ST1. In the present embodiment, the case of the jackpot is also a long fluctuation time. In this case, by outputting to the hall computer etc. that the game is played with the second special symbol, it is possible for the gaming shop side to perform monitoring of an unauthorized game and guidance in a correct game method.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was set as the long fluctuation time by the 2nd special symbol in the case of a hit, you may comprise by short fluctuation time, such as 500 ms, in the case of a hit. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress a failure that the hit variation is not executed in the first special symbol by the extremely long hit variation being executed in the second special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (a), in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the variation time of the first special symbol in the case of being out is configured as 180,000 ms, which is set extremely long. The variation time of the first special symbol, which is one hit, is configured to be 500 ms and set short. By configuring in this way, even if the first special symbol of the first change becomes a big hit E after the transition to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2, it is difficult to understand that the transition to the latent probability varying gaming state ST2 has occurred. it can. Furthermore, the jackpot game can be executed continuously, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, the variation time of removal of the second special symbol is configured to be 180000 ms, and is set to be extremely long. On the other hand, the hit variation time is set to 5000 ms, and is set in accordance with a period during which a treasure chest effect to be described later is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured not to simultaneously change the variable display which is a big hit, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the variable display which is a large hit may be simultaneously performed When configured, the first special symbol has a variation display time which is a jackpot of the second special symbol shorter (for example, 5 seconds) or extremely short variation time (for example, 0.5 second) than the first special symbol. The variation time that is the jackpot of the symbol may be configured such that a variation time (for example, 60 seconds) longer than the second special symbol or an extremely long variation time (for example, 5 minutes) is selected. In this way, by configuring, it is possible to postpone the jackpot with the second special symbol that the jackpot B, which is the jackpot type disadvantageous to the player, may be determined, and in the meantime, the second special The jackpot C can be awarded to the player by winning the jackpot with a symbol. In this case, when a jackpot is started with one special symbol, a configuration may be considered in which the lottery game in motion with the other special symbol is invalidated. By configuring in this manner, the jackpot C, which is a disadvantage jackpot type for the player, is given and determined immediately after the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set, and the probability variation gaming state ST3 ends in a short period of time Problems can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the above-described configuration in which the variable display with the success / failure determination result being the big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously displayed in a variable manner, the determination result of the first special symbol is a fluctuation that is out of place. By setting the display time to be long (for example, 100 seconds) and setting the variation time for the success / failure determination result in the second special symbol to be short (for example, 1 second), the first special symbol can be displayed during the short-time game. The number of times the lottery result is displayed can be reduced (the number of times the first special symbol is variably displayed) can be reduced, and the number of lotteries with the second special symbol advantageous to the player can be increased. In addition, when the number of time reductions is until the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed 100 times, the change time of the first special symbol is set to 100 times continuously with the second special symbol coming off and changing. By configuring the time longer than the time when the variable display is performed, it is possible to effectively reduce the number of times that the second special symbol changes and displays during the short time game.

  Returning to FIG. 13, the description of the various counters will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). The ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball passes through the first normal symbol start opening 67a or the second normal symbol start opening 67b. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (FIG. 15 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the value of the second random number counter C4 If the second random number matches the value of the random number to be set by the second random number table 202c (FIG. 15 (c)), it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol.

  When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and the ball is the first normal symbol start port 67a (through gate) or the second normal symbol start port 67b ( It is acquired when it is detected that the vehicle has passed through gates. The number of random numbers to be won is 5 in the normal gaming state ST1, and the range is “5 to 9”. Further, in the high probability gaming state, it is 200, and the range is “5 to 204”. That is, in the normal gaming state ST1, it is determined to be won when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 9", and in the high probability gaming state, the acquired second collision random number counter It is determined to be won when the value of C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", and the symbol of "o" is lit and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop symbol (second symbol), In the normal gaming state ST1, the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b are opened once for a predetermined time (1.2 s in this embodiment), and in the high probability gaming state, the predetermined time (real implementation) In the configuration, the opening operation of 1 s) is performed twice. Note that the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). As well as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 41).

  When the game ball passes the first normal symbol start opening 67a or the second normal symbol start opening 67b, each counter based on the holding ball in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is not in the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) If the value is not stored, a random value is acquired from the second random number counter C4 in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. Also, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner or when the random number value corresponding to the holding ball stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is less than the upper limit (4 pieces in this embodiment) Is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the number of holding times (normal symbol holding 1 to 4) corresponding to the random number value acquired from the second random number counter C4. In addition, when a random number value is stored in each area, the normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to ON, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is stopped based on the random value, or by having suspended the reservation. When data is shifted to the previous holding area, it is set to off. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the newly shifted and stored reserved area is set to on. Whether or not the data is stored in the reserve area, or whether the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is determined depending on which reserve area or the normal symbol flag of the execution area is on.

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery between the first lottery game and the second lottery game is configured to select various common counter values. However, the first lottery game (first special symbol) and the second lottery game are selected. Set different counters for each game (second special symbol), and update them with different values by changing the update triggers and initial values of the various counters for the first lottery game and the second lottery game. Of course, the counter value may be configured.

  In this way, by configuring, even if the counter value is acquired at the same opportunity in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to acquire counter values of different values, It is possible to suppress a failure that the fluctuation pattern selected by the 1 special symbol and the 2nd special symbol and the judgment result of success or failure are synchronized.

  In addition, even if the variation pattern is selected from the common variation pattern table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a problem that the selected variation pattern is synchronized is suppressed, and various effects are produced. It can be performed. Further, the data stored in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be suppressed, and an inexpensive configuration (using a RAM or the like having a small storage area) can be achieved.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on due to the cancellation of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power interruption. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (S1600) (see FIG. 45), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 44) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 43) is immediately executed as a power failure process.

  The RAM 203 has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e. , Normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, remaining ball timer 203o, probability variation effective flag 203p, discharge number counter 203s, time saving medium counter 203t, big hit flag 203u, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w, prefetch holding ball storage area 203x, small hitting flag 203y, time saving flag 203a2, other At least it has a Rieria 203z.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on winning in the first starting opening 630 up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). is there. In addition, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b stores various counter values acquired based on the game ball winning in the second starting opening 640 up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). Storage area for

  The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops variable display, When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting variable display of the second special symbol are stored, and for details, the first special symbol holding ball execution area ( Not shown).

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is started The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) upon detection of winning are stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first start port 630 or the right first start port 631 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is read from the counter buffer. The value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second start opening 640, the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are obtained from the counter buffer in the same manner as the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and the corresponding They are similarly stored in the area (not shown).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect, the above-described first to execute processing such as a jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, etc. Of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1) corresponding to each start winning combination stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, it corresponds to one start winning combination The data is shifted to this special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is a second random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) upon detection of the start winning combination of the first normal symbol starting opening 67a or the second normal symbol starting opening 67b. This is a storage area to be stored. When the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 detects that the ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (start winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), The value of the second per-random number counter C4 is acquired from the counter buffer and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. A normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to ON and stored (stored). The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has four holding areas so that data (the value of the counter C4, a normal symbol flag (not shown)) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. have. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the data of the holding ball in the order of passing (starting winning) to the first normal symbol starting opening 67a or the second normal symbol starting opening 67b, among the holding areas where the data is vacant, Are stored in order from the reserved area in the earlier order.

  In addition, when it is detected that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation indication production of normal design on the basis of the starting winning a prize, each counter value is stored in the normal design holding ball execution area (not shown) Or, it is a memory for storing data (the value of the counter C4) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) on the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation display effect of the normal symbol, in order to execute processing such as winning lottery or setting of display of the second symbol display device 83 or the second symbol display device 88 Of the data (the value of the second random number counter C4) corresponding to each start winning combination stored in the above-mentioned normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the data corresponding to one starting winning combination, this normal symbol holding Shift to sphere execution area (not shown). Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e are the first start detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. The number of holding balls (the number of waits) of the variable display effect (the variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning of the mouth 630 or the second start opening 640 Each is a counter that counts up to 4 times. In the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e, zero is set as an initial value by the initial setting process (S1514 in FIG. 44) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the start winning is detected and the number of balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 respectively. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed.

  Further, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the first special symbol hold based on the winning of the game ball in the first start port 630 or the right first start port 631. When the counter value is stored in the ball storage area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by one. It is.

  Further, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the counter value stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b based on the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 640. Is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reservation ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203 e is incremented by one. It is.

  The MPU 201 sets each value of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). When it is stored, the data stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is subjected to a first special symbol variation start process (figure 23, S203) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S206), and performs a big hit lottery based on the reference data, and determines the variation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result. In the first symbol display device 37, a variable display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

  Further, the change pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 change pattern command and stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a first normal symbol start port 67a or a second normal symbol start port 67b detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. The variable display effect (the second symbol display device 83 of the third symbol display device 81, the second symbol performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the game ball passing (hereinafter referred to as "start winning combination") It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display effect performed on the display device 88 up to four times each. The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of holding balls stored based on passage of the gaming ball through the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b. The initial value is set to zero by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (FIG. 44, S1514). Then, each time the start winning is detected and the number of balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed (see S1205 in FIG. 41).

  The normal symbol flag (not shown) is a flag indicating that the data of the second random number counter C4 is stored and indicating that it is being held, and is a flag indicating that the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is there. When the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) or the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, it is set to ON. In addition, when the value of the second per-counter C4 is shifted to the next reserved area (the reserved area corresponding to the reserved number in which the reserved number is reduced by one, the reserved area before the shift) The normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to OFF, while the normal symbol flag (not shown) of the reserved area that is shifted and stored is set to ON. In addition, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is subjected to the fluctuation stop processing, the normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to off.

  The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability gaming state (latent probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3). When the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the gaming state is the high probability gaming state (latency probability changing gaming state ST2 or the probability changing gaming state ST3), and when off, includes the low probability gaming state (time saving gaming state ST1h) It shows that it is). In the present embodiment, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON when a probability variation setting flag 203h, which will be described later, is set to ON when the jackpot game ends (see S11682 in FIG. 50). On the other hand, it is set to off when the jackpot game is started. In the initialized state, it is set to OFF, and when a normal power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure is backed up.

  The probability variation setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the high probability gaming state (latency probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3) after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the high probability gaming state (latency probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3) is determined by the probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the jackpot game. It is determined by whether or not the game ball has passed. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1682 in FIG. 50). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF based on being set to ON. The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Also, in the initialized state, it is set to off.

  If the probability change setting flag is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability change switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it is determined that it is passing, the probability change setting flag 203h May be set to turn on formally and return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off based on whether or not a probability variation passage counter 203i described later is a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the damage on the gaming shop side by determining the injustice where only the probability change setting flag 203h is rewritten to ON and the power is turned on again while the power is off. it can.

  The probability variation passing counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot A in this embodiment). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether all the gaming balls that have won a prize are discharged to the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 by the sum of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203s described later. This probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by one and updated when the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed (S1681 in FIG. 50). Further, after the process of determining whether the number of gaming balls having won the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls is executed, the value is reset to “0” which is an initial value (S1711 in FIG. 51). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, the game ball is added and updated one by one based on detection that the game ball has passed through the detection opening 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning device 65 (S1673 in FIG. 50). . On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings on the variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of discharged items (total value of the number-of-discharges counter 203s and the probability variation passing counter 203i) is one. After it is determined whether it is correct, the initial value is reset to “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting (counting) the time for which the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, the passage solenoid 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of 14 rounds in the jackpot A, and the passage solenoid 65k is 0.5 based on the start of 14 rounds in the jackpot B and the jackpot E. Set to on for seconds. In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as start data of 14 rounds for the big hit A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set for the big hit B (S1642 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, in the process of S1679 of the winning process (FIG. 50, S1632) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main controller 110, 1 is subtracted and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the flow passage solenoid 65k is set to be off. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to an initial value of 0 in the initialized state. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, the winning to the probability variation switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

  The notification counter 203 m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in the present embodiment, an audio of “seeing liquid crystal”) for attracting the player's attention. In this embodiment, the notification counter 203m corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (10 ball winnings in the variable winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). The notification counter 203m is updated by being decremented by one by the process of S1664 in the notification process (S1631 in FIG. 49) of the main control device 110. Based on the notification counter 203 m becoming 0, a notification command to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 is set. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this command, the above-described processing for outputting the voice is executed.

  By configuring in this manner, a voice of "seeing liquid crystal" is output before the start of the 14th round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so the player can display the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Watch 81. Here, in the 13th round of the jackpot game, on the third symbol display device 81, a character of a girl is displayed, and a character of “attention” which is a notification that prompts the player to view the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It is displayed. In the 14th round, since the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, if the operation is watched by the player, the type of jackpot being executed is determined. In order for the player to keep expectation that the probability variation game state ST3 will be given until the end of the jackpot game, the player makes the movement of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 6A) invisible. Notification effects are being performed. However, when the 13th round is completed, there is a possibility that the player may see the switching member 65h during the interval display, so that the third symbol display device 81 is informed by voice during the interval period. Informing effect is executed. As a result, after the interval effect is executed, the player's attention can be drawn to the displayed display content, and the player's attention can be diverted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to alert the player to show the 3rd symbol display device 81 so as to distract the player from the switching member 65h. You may alert | report so that the movement of the switching member 65h may be hidden by a player's hand by alert | reporting so that a player's hand may be held over the apparatus 65. FIG. Moreover, not only the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 but you may comprise so that a player may be distracted by alert | reporting so that a decoration lamp 34 etc. may be seen to a player. Furthermore, it may be configured to distract the player's attention by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like during 13 rounds and informing the user to read it with a mobile phone. In the present embodiment, the effect that diverts attention is set to the longest time (5 seconds from the start of the 14th round) until the operation of the switching member 65h ends. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the problem of determining whether the jackpot A, jackpot C, jackpot D or jackpot B, jackpot E is determined by the notification time.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203 n is set to ON, it indicates that the open / close door 65 f 1 of the variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, a remaining ball timer 203o described later is added and updated by 1 (see S1632 in FIG. 50). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time after the open / close door 65f1 is closed, and for determining whether the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. Is a counter.

  The remaining ball timer 203o is a time required for the game balls to be discharged to the variable winning device 65 to be discharged when the preset one round is finished and the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed. It is a counter for determining whether or not elapses. In this embodiment, the time required until the game ball won in the variable winning device 65 is discharged is 2 seconds. In this embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203o in advance. Is set as Based on the fact that the remaining ball timer 203o has reached the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 matches the number of dischargings (see FIG. S1707 of FIG. If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that effect. Therefore, it can be early notified that the game ball is clogged in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the variable winning device 65, the impact is applied at the start timing of the 14th round, and the game ball is reached to the switching member 65h earlier than the actual, so that the big hit B and the big hit E Even in this case, it is possible to suppress the fraud that causes the probability changing switch 65e3 to pass the gaming ball.

  It should be noted that if the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3. The configuration may not be set to ON. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that the probability change game state ST3 is given illegally.

  When the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to off, the probability variation effective flag 203p is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is to be validated. When the probability variation effective flag 203p is set to ON, the gaming ball having flowed into the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) is probability variation switch 65e3 based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 65k is on. It shows that it is less than the time required to go through. That is, it is indicated that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  The probability variation valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the probability variation valid flag 203p described above is set to ON. After the flow rate solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability variation valid timer 203r, it is possible to determine a period necessary for normally passing the probability variation switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge port 65e2 to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds. Thereafter, even if the probability variation switch 65e3 passes, it is determined to be illegal and not determined to be passed.

  Thus, in a state where the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge port 65e2 illegally, the special discharge port 65e2 is allowed to enter the ball and the gaming ball is passed through the probability changing switch 65h It is possible to suppress the damage caused by the fraud, such as pushing up the ball and passing it, or causing the magnetic sensor to be erroneously detected as passing by a radio wave or the like.

  The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The number-of-discharges counter 203s is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls are determined (S1711 in FIG. 51).

  The time saving counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of times of fluctuation of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state ST1h. At this time, the counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability change setting flag is off at the end of the big hit game. In other words, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot game, if the probability change game state ST3 is not set, the game state shifts to the 100-time short-time game state ST1h.

  The jackpot flag 203u determines that the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is a hit at the start of fluctuation based on winning in the first start opening 630, the right first start opening 631, or the second start opening 640. It is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off. In addition, it is comprised with the flag which can identify whether it is a jackpot corresponding to which symbol of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol. Specifically, the big hit flag 203u is set to be ON for the first special symbol with "10", and the big hit flag 203u is set to ON for the second special symbol with "10" in "10", At "00", the jackpot flag 203u is set as off.

  Here, since the jackpot flag 203u is commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, at the start of the change, one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is first set on If it is determined that the other lottery result is a jackpot, the jackpot flag 203u is not overwritten or not, and the other lottery result is processed in the same manner as being out. Thereby, it can process so that the fluctuation | variation display which becomes a jackpot simultaneously may not be performed with a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol.

  In other words, when the variation display that is a big hit with either one of the special symbols is started, the variation display that is a big hit is not started on the other side, and only the out-of-change manner is displayed.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot flag 203u is common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and independent jackpot flags are set for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. And you may comprise so that the fluctuation | variation display which becomes a jackpot simultaneously with a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol may be performed. With such a configuration, even if the variable display of jackpot B and jackpot E is started with the first special symbol during the probability variation gaming state ST3, the fluctuation time is set long, the second special By making it easy to draw a lottery with a short variation time with a symbol, it is possible to make a big hit with the second special symbol before the big hit B is started. Therefore, an effect that informs the player of the time until the jackpot B is started (that is, the period until the probability variation gaming state ST3 ends) is executed, and the player is rushed to win the jackpot with the second special symbol. It is possible to execute an effect to play a game in an attempt to win. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a fresh presentation. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  The special figure 1 variation stop flag 203v is a flag indicating that the jackpot game of the second special symbol starts to be executed while the first special symbol is variably displayed. In S1004 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 36, S207) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. Moreover, it sets to OFF in the process of S611 of a 1st special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S204).

  The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is variably displayed. In S605 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S204) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. In addition, in the process of S1011 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 36, S207), it is set to OFF.

  The prefetch storage area 203x stores discrimination information such as jackpot types, variation types, and the like for the holding balls stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Storage area.

  The small hit flag 203y is a flag indicating that the result of the determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. The small hit flag is configured to be able to identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the small hit. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so as not to make a small hit at the same time (if one is a small hit, the other is out). Therefore, the small hit flag 203y is not a value indicating that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are small hits.

  The short time flag 203a2 is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol time short state (electric support state, normal symbol high probability gaming state). If the value of the hour reduction flag 203a2 is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol time reduction state (power support state), and if the value of the time reduction flag 203a2 is off, the pachinko machine 10 is the special symbol normal It shows that it is a state (low probability state of a normal symbol). The short time flag 203a2 has an initial value set to off, and is set to on at the end of the jackpot type of jackpot type with power support in the ending process (see FIG. 48) executed at the end of the jackpot game. (See S1655 in FIG. 48). Then, it is referred to determine whether or not the gaming state is short (power support) state in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 41) (see S1208 and S1214 in FIG. 41), and the next big hit game is started (S607 in FIG. 29, S1007 in FIG. 36) or when the number of times the lottery of the special symbol in the short time (power support) state reaches a predetermined number (see S628 in FIG. 30), it is set to OFF.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing and storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening solenoid for driving the specific winning opening 65a, and an electric part A solenoid 209 made up of a solenoid for driving and the like is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Various processes are executed based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34), Setting control of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable display). The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22, and the like.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and displays the winning order displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player. The audio output device 226 is controlled and the display control device 114 is instructed to rearrange the displayed reserved symbol display in the order of the variable display start.

  A vibration sensor (not shown) is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the case of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to change the flow of the ball by vibration and to prevent the winning of the winning opening intentionally, because winning in the starting opening is an important factor in determining the gaming state. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that vibration has been given to the pachinko machine 10 by a player or the like, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or a situation of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of the error. It transmits to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

<Electric Configuration of Audio Lamp Control Device 113>
Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 21A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. In the ROM 222, at least a variation pattern selection table 222a is set.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining the detailed contents of the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. The fluctuation pattern selection table 222a indicates a plurality of types of fluctuation contents (for example, fluctuation) corresponding to fluctuation time and rough fluctuation patterns (reach, non-reach, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110. One variation content is determined from the reach variation patterns of the display contents having the same time and the same determination result.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 has a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 223d, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f , A special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, a special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i, an effect counter 223j, a slave state setting area 223k, and another memory area 223z are provided.

  The command storage area 223a is an area temporarily stored until various commands output from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 are processed. In detail, it is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 46) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process is performed. , And the command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and in each of these areas The winning information is stored respectively. Based on the information stored in this winning information storage area 223a, the voice lamp control device 113 can discriminate the lottery result of the reserved ball before the start of the fluctuation.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is, similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110, the fluctuation effect (variation) performed in the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) Display) and is a counter that counts up to four times the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of holding balls is managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls in the variable display is added by entering the ball to first start port 630 or right first start port 631, or in the special symbol in main controller 110 When the variable display is performed and the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command. The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223b. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the holding ball number counter 203d.

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also holds the first special symbol holding after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the number-of-balls counter 223 b, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball for the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to display several symbols in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The second special symbol holding ball number counter 223d is based on the holding ball number command in which the number of holding balls corresponding to the second special symbol is output from the main control device 110 with respect to the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c And the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off as an initial value at the time of power on, and it is turned on when special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command to notify the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol outputted from main controller 110 is received. Set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  Special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set as an initial value off when the power is turned on, and turns on when it receives a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol outputted from main controller 110 Set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON when a second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The effect counter 223j is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, selecting an addition time from the addition time selection table 222b, and the like. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Note that one is added and updated each time the main processing is executed.

  In the slave state setting area 223k, data corresponding to the state command output from the main controller 110 is set. Based on the data set in the slave state setting area 223h, the current gaming state can also be determined by the voice lamp control device 113. The state setting command is output from the main control device 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backed-up gaming state can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch (see FIG. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3). And a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 has the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3) depressed when the power is turned on (power is applied while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122)). In this case, it is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes control processing such as detection of winning of special symbols and ordinary symbols, and various lotterys such as winning and selection of fluctuation patterns for the winnings. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably execute the control of the pachinko machine 10, a lottery for determining whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting is controlled as in the present embodiment. By performing the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  The control boards of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are covered with a box (box) made of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member, which is called a board box. The substrate box is caulked by an anti-fraud member called “sealing member” so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated. Generally, when a base member and a lid member are fitted together, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through-hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member. It is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member only by a method of destroying the member forming the through hole or squeezing the sealing member, etc. There is.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a ROM 234, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. An output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since the display control device 114 is a common part, cost reduction is achieved.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described. First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is canceled, first, various processes are executed according to the control program stored in the ROM 234.

  As described above, the ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the ROM 234 after canceling the system reset via the bus line 240 and executes the control program stored in the ROM 234. The ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the ROM 234 to the work RAM 233. The MPU 231 outputs the image data transferred to the work RAM 233 to the third symbol display device 81 as needed, and performs display control of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are configured such that the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37, in the 7-segment LED on the left side of the two 7-segment LEDs of the 7-segment display 37b, the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, and the 7 on the right In the segment LED, the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment) There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) of the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b The through gate passage processing accompanied by the passage of the ball at step S104 is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through-gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 23, S104) performs various determinations and decisions on the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the acquired counter values, and the variation display determined by predetermined control In this manner, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are controlled so as to be able to perform variable display at the same time, or are controlled to be stopped and displayed in a display manner indicating the determination result. The special symbol variation process (FIG. 23, S104) will be described below.

  In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 23, S104), it is first determined whether or not a big hit game is being played (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot is being hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202). If it is determined that the variation display of the first special symbol is being performed (S202: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204). In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S204), when the specified fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the fluctuation display has passed, the processing to stop the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the judgment result of the first lottery game is executed Be done. Further, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), the second special symbol is suspended and suspended with a symbol indicating a big hit (or small hit), and the big lottery game (or small hit game) of the second lottery game is executed. In this case, a process for forcibly stopping the first special symbol during the variable display is executed. In addition, when the second special symbol is variably stopped with a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit), the variation of the first special symbol in the variation display may be interrupted (temporary stop). Details of the first special symbol variation stopping process (S204) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not in a variable display (S202: No), a first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203). In the first special symbol variation start process (S203), if the reserve data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol reserve ball number storage area 203a, the jackpot determination based on the reserve data and the selection of the variation pattern Processing is performed. In the first special symbol variation start process (S203), if the lottery result is a big hit (or small win), the big hit flag 203u (or small hit flag 203y) is set to ON. Thereby, during the execution of the variable display based on the big hit (or small hit) of the first special symbol, control is performed so that the variable display of the second special symbol becomes an outlier variable display. The first special symbol variation start process (S203) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. In addition, when it is configured to suspend (temporarily stop) the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the fluctuation display when the second special symbol is stopped by the symbol indicating the big hit (or the small hit), it is interrupted (temporary stop) What is necessary is just to comprise so that the process which restarts the fluctuation | variation display of the 1st special symbol currently temporarily stopped) may be performed.

  After the first special symbol variation start process (S203) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed (S205). If it is determined that the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S205: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process (S207) is executed. The second special symbol variation stop process (S207) will be described in detail later. Similar to the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), when the specified variation time of the second special symbol during variation display has elapsed. The process of stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is executed. In addition, when the first special symbol is stopped by the symbol indicating big hit (or small hit) and the big win game (or small hit game) of the first lottery game is executed, the second special symbol in the variable display is displayed. Processing for forcibly stopping is executed. In addition, when the first special symbol is changed and stopped with the symbol indicating the big hit (or small hit), the change of the second special symbol during the change display may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). The details of the second special symbol variation stop process (S207) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not in a variable display (S205: No), a second special symbol variation start process is executed (S206). In the second special symbol variation start process (S206), if the reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203b, the jackpot determination and the variation pattern selection based on the reserved data Processing is performed. In the second special symbol variation start process (S206), if the lottery result is a big hit (or small win), the big hit flag 203u (or small hit flag 203y) is set to ON. As a result, during the execution of the variable display based on the big hit (or small hit) of the second special symbol, control is performed so that the variable display of the first special symbol becomes an outlier variable display. The second special symbol variation start process (S206) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. In addition, when it is configured to suspend (temporarily stop) the variation of the second special symbol in the variation display when the first special symbol is stopped by the symbol indicating the big hit (or the small hit), it is suspended ( What is necessary is just to comprise so that the process which restarts the fluctuation | variation display of the 2nd special symbol currently temporarily stopped) may be performed.

  Next, the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S203).

  In the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S303) . A process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding area 1 to the holding area 4 of the first special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed (S304). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in such a way as holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3 and so on.

  Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S305). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 24, S305) will be described in detail later, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), Based on the set gaming state, the jackpot determination of whether or not the jackpot is executed.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S306). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306), which will be described in detail later, is a result of the success / failure determination based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value.

  Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S203), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation gaming state ST3 (during a probability variation) (S402). Whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state ST3 is determined based on whether or not the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON. If it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is on (that is, the gaming state is probability change gaming state ST3 (during a definite change)) (S402: Yes), the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A) is displayed. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value for high probability, and the lottery result is obtained (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is off (that is, the gaming state is the low probability gaming state (not positive variation)) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a (FIG. 15A) Whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value for low probability time is determined based on the reference), and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

  When the process of S403 or S404 is completed, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is on (S405). Here, when the jackpot flag 203u or the jackpot flag 203y is set to ON, it indicates that the second special symbol has started a change that becomes a jackpot or jackpot. In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203u (and the small jackpot flag 203y) is used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that the jackpot at the same time with the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is configured so that no fluctuations are executed. By comprising in this way, the big hit (or small hit) generate | occur | produces continuously for a short time, and the malfunction which the loss by the side of a game store becomes large excessively can be suppressed. In addition, when the change which becomes big hit or small hit in the 2nd special symbol is started, without performing the drawing of the 1st special symbol (by skipping the processing of S402 to S404), the first special symbol It is also possible to execute the fluctuation display based on the deviation (special figure 1 deviation fluctuation processing (S410)). As a result, since the lottery process (the process from S402 to S404) can be skipped, the processing load can be reduced.

  In S405, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u and the small hit flag 203y are off, that is, when it is determined that the variation that becomes the big hit or the small hit is not started in the second special symbol (S405: No ), It is determined whether the lottery result executed in the process of S403 or S404 is a jackpot (S406). When it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S406: Yes), the jackpot flag 203u is set on for the first special symbol (S407). After that, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1 lottery result) is set as a big hit (S408), and the big hit symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the value of the big hit type counter C1. The game state is set based on the game state (S409). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S405, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y for the second special symbol is on (S405: Yes), or it is determined that the lottery result is out in the process of S406. In the case (S406: No), the special figure 1 deviation variation process is executed (S410). In addition, although this special figure 1 deviation fluctuation processing (S410) is explained with reference to FIG. 26, the setting etc. of the outlying symbol when the lottery result of the first special symbol is out are executed.

  In this way, even if the lottery result based on the value of the first random number C1 actually acquired is a big win, the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is already set to ON, (2) If the jackpot or jackpot variation is started by the special symbol, the setting to be forcibly removed is executed with the first special symbol. As a result, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, fluctuations that are big hits (or small hits) are not executed at the same time, and consecutive big hits (or small hits) are made in a short period of time. It is possible to suppress such a problem that the fluctuation on the side of the game shop becomes excessive when the fluctuation is started. Moreover, the big hit (or small win) is performed simultaneously or continuously, and the malfunction that a player will be confused can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured not to perform the big hit variation at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to execute simultaneously. In this case, a dedicated jackpot flag may be set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, if the jackpot game is executed with the other special symbol, the fluctuation of one special symbol temporarily stops the measurement of the fluctuation time, It is conceivable to configure to stop temporarily.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special figure 1 deviation fluctuation processing (S410), which is one of the first special symbol fluctuation start processing (FIG. 24, S203), will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special view 1 deviation variation process (S410). In the special figure 1 deviation variation process (FIG. 26, S410), first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is on for the second special symbol (S412). If it is determined that the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is on (S412: Yes), the first special symbol deviating symbol is set in the first special symbol display device 37 (S416). Thereafter, this process is terminated. In this way, when the big win or the small win is set for the second special symbol, the detachable symbol is forcibly set for the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem in which a variation that is a big hit or a small hit is executed simultaneously in the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, in the process of S411, if it is determined that the big hit flag 203u and the small hit flag 203y are off for the second special symbol (S411: No), whether the lottery result is a small hit is It is determined on the basis of the game state and the small hitting random number table 202b (see FIG. 15 (b)) (S412). In the process of S412, when it is determined that it is not a small hit (S412: No), since the lottery result is out, the process of S416 is executed, and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S412 that the game is a small hit (S412: Yes), the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S413). The lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a small hit (S414), and the small special symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S415). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306), which is a process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203), will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 27, S306), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305), whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, ie, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501). Here, whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203u is on for the first special symbol. The jackpot flag 203u is set to ON in the process of S407 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 25) described above.

  In the process of S501, if it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the current gaming state (normal gaming state ST1, latency probability changing gaming state ST2, probability changing gaming state ST3, A fluctuation pattern selection table 202e is set according to any of the time saving game states ST1h) (S502). The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 16A to 16C) corresponding to the set gaming state and the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2. (S503). A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern selection table 203e set in the process of S502 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S504). A special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is generated based on the fluctuation pattern selected in the process of S504 (S505). Thereafter, the process of S507 is performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S501 that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the big hit flag 203u for the first special symbol is off) (S501: No), the special figure 1 is out. A variation pattern selection process is executed (S506).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 28, this special view 1 out-of-variation variation pattern selection process (S506) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special view 1 deviation pattern selection process (S506). In the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 28, S506), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit (S511). Here, it is determined whether the small hitting flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S511). When it is determined that the small hitting flag 203y is on (S511: Yes), a small hitting fluctuation pattern is set (S512). In the case of a small hit, one type of fluctuation pattern is set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Specifically, a fluctuation pattern of 3000 ms (3 seconds) of fluctuation time is set. When the process of S512 is completed, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command indicating a small hit is set (S513). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S511, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a small hit (that is, out of place) (S511: No), the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (see FIG. 17 and FIG. 18) is set (S514). Out of the variation pattern selection table, a variation pattern of outliers is selected based on the result of determination of yes / no (outside) and the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 (S515). A special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected outlier fluctuation pattern (S516). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 27, the description will be continued. After executing the processing of S505 or the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 28, S506), the processing of S507 is executed. In the process of S507, a state command indicating the current gaming state is set (S507). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the first special symbol variation stop processing (S204), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 22, S104), will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation stop process (S204).

  In the first special symbol fluctuation stopping process (FIG. 29, S204), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601). In the process of S601, when it is determined that the end timing of the fluctuation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601: Yes), the big hit flag 203u is turned on for the first special symbol (special diagram 1). Is determined (S602). When it is determined that the big hit flag 203u is set to ON for the first special symbol (S602: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (S603). Although illustration is omitted, when the processing of S603 is executed, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is turned on is set.

  When the process of S603 is finished, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating the set stop type is set (S604). Then, the start of the jackpot game based on the selected jackpot type is set (S605). Thereafter, the time-shortage counter 203t is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S606), and the time-shortage flag 203a2 is set to OFF (S607). Next, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol is set (S608). A process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S609), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S601 that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601: No), then whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is on is determined. It discriminate | determines (S610). If it is determined in the process of S610 that the special view 1 fluctuation stop flag 203y is off (S610: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S610 that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is on (S610 in FIG. 29), the second special symbol is stopped at the big hit or the small hit, In order to stop the fluctuation based on the first special symbol, the processing of S611 and S612 is executed. In the process of S611, the special view 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to the process of S612.

  In S612, the special view 1 off stop process is executed to stop and display the first special symbol in the off mode. In the above-described processing of S602, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is off for the special figure 1 (S602: No), similarly, the special figure for stopping and displaying the first special symbol in an outlier manner. A one-off stop process is executed (S612). When the process of S612 is finished, this process is finished.

  As described above, in the first special symbol stop process (S204), when the specified variation time of the first special symbol during the variation display has elapsed (S601: Yes), the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is used. Processing for stopping the variable display (S603 to S609 or S612) is performed. In addition, when the second special symbol is stopped by the symbol indicating big hit (or small hit) and the big win game (or small hit game) of the second lottery game is executed (S610: Yes), the variable display is being performed. A process (S612) for forcibly stopping the first special symbol is executed. In addition, when the first special symbol is suspended by the symbol indicating the big hit (or small hit) (S610: Yes), the configuration of the second special symbol during the variation display is suspended (temporarily stopped). May be.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 30, this special view 1 off stop processing (S612) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special view 1 disconnection stop process (S612). In the special figure 1 stop processing (S612), first, it is determined whether the small hitting flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S621). Special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to on (S622). Then, a special 2 fluctuation stop command is set (S623), which indicates that the special drawing 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (the special drawing 2 indicates that the fluctuation is forcibly stopped). The start of the small hit game is set (S624). Thereafter, the process of S625 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S621, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203y is off for the first special symbol (S621: No), the lottery result of the first special symbol is out, so S622. The processing of S624 is skipped to shift to the processing of S625. In the process of S625, it is determined whether or not the time saving middle counter 203t is a value larger than 0 (S625). If it is determined in the process of S625 that the hour / minute counter 203t is greater than 0 (S625: Yes), the hour / hour counter 203t is decremented by 1 and updated (S626), and the hour / hour counter 203t after the subtraction is 0. It is determined whether or not (S627). If it is determined in the process of S627 that the time saving counter 203t is 0 (S627: Yes), the time saving game state ST1h is ended, so the time saving flag 203a2 is set to OFF (S628), The process proceeds to S629.

  On the other hand, in the process of S627, if it is determined that the reduced time counter 203t after subtraction is not 0 (greater than 0) (S627; No), the reduced time gaming state ST1h is continued, so the process of S628 is performed. Skip to step S629.

  In the process of S629, a special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S629). A process of changing and stopping the first special symbol variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S630). Thereafter, this process is performed. Here, referring back to FIG. 29, after the special figure 1 disconnection stop process (S608) is executed, this process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time. However, if the first special symbol is changed and stopped by the lottery result of the big hit or the small hit, the second special symbol is displayed. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON so that the process of forcibly fluctuating and stopping the special symbol is performed. On the other hand, as will be described later, in the case where the second special symbol is to be changed and stopped based on the lottery result of the big win or the small win, the special figure 1 change stop flag 203v is set to ON so that the change of the first special symbol is stopped. It is forcibly executed. Thereby, the simultaneous change of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol can be performed efficiently.

  In addition, when the first big symbol or the second special symbol has already begun to be a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly released as a result of the determination of whether or not it is missed. The variable display is started. Therefore, it can suppress that big hit and small hit are forcibly performed continuously, and can suppress the malfunction in which euphoria becomes high too much.

  Next, the second special symbol variation start process (S206), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S206).

  In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31, S206), the first special symbol retention ball number of each process from S301 to S306 with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203) described above. Counter 203d, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter (N1), the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol big hit determination processing (S305), the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S306) In each process from S701 to S706, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter (N2), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the second special symbol reserved ball hit determination process (S705) The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706) is the same as the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706), except that it is changed, respectively, so the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S206) will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705).

  The second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 32, S705) is different from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305) described above in the following points. In the process of S801 corresponding to the process of S401, the first special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown) is changed to the second special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown), and the process of S408 In the corresponding process of S808, the special figure 1 (first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 (second special symbol), and in the processes of S809 and S810 corresponding to the processes of S409 and S410, the first They differ in that the special symbol is changed to the second special symbol. Since the other points are the same, the description thereof is omitted. Similarly, the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S810 in FIG. 32, FIG. 33) executed in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 32) is also the above-described special figure 1 deviation variation process (see FIG. 26). Since the process similar to is performed with respect to a 2nd special symbol, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706), which is a process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S206), will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706).

  The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 34, S706) differs from the above-described first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 27, S306) in the following points. In the process of S901 corresponding to the process of S501, the special figure 1 lottery result (the first special symbol lottery result) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (the second special symbol lottery result), and S506 to S507 It differs in the point that a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command (a fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command in each processing of S906 to S907 corresponding to each processing up to. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  Next, the second special symbol variation stop process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation stop process (S207). The second special symbol variation stop process (S207) is different from the above-described first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 29, S204) in the following points. In the process of S1002 corresponding to the process of S602, “with respect to special figure 1” is changed to “with respect to special figure 2”, and with the process of S1003 corresponding to the process of S603, special figure 2 The point that the variable stop flag is changed to the special figure 1 variable stop flag, the point that the special figure 1 stop type command is changed to the special figure 2 stop type command in the process of S1004 corresponding to the process of S604, and S609 and The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag in the processes of S1009 and S1010 corresponding to the process of S610, and the special figure 1 outage stop process is special in the process of S1011 corresponding to S611. They are different from each other in that they are changed to the off stop processing in FIG. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  Also, the special figure 2 off stop process (S1011 in FIG. 36, FIG. 37) executed in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 36) is similarly the special figure 1 off stop process described above (see FIG. 30) Since the process similar to is performed with respect to a 2nd special symbol, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously displayed in a variable manner. It can be done. Therefore, a lottery game with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a big hit will be given to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play a game efficiently.

  In addition, even if the lottery game is executed with the first special symbol and the second special symbol variably displayed at the same time, if a big hit game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, Since the variable display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when it is made a stop display of a big hit or a small hit by either one of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, it was constituted so that the other special symbol is forcedly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the variation time is interrupted. In such a case, the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. You can grasp what is not, you can play the jackpot game with confidence.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the start winning process (S105) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). In the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105), if it is determined that the game ball has won in any of the first start opening 630, the right first start opening 631, and the second start opening 640, the game is put on hold The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol each counter value acquired up to the upper limit number (up to four in each of the first starting opening 630 and the right first starting opening 631 and the second starting opening 640) This is a process of storing each in the reserved ball storage area 203b. In addition, when each counter value acquired based on the holding ball is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a Or based on each counter value memorized by each of the 2nd special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, processing which predicts a success / failure determination result, a variation pattern selected, etc. in advance is performed. Hereinafter, the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105) will be described.

  In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 38), it is first determined whether the ball has won the first start hole 630 or the right first start hole 631 which is the first start hole (start winning) (S1101). Here, the winning of the first start opening 630 or the right first start opening 631 is detected. If it is determined that the ball has won the first starting opening 630 or the right first starting opening 631 (there is a starting winning) (S1101: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is It is acquired (S1102). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103). It is determined whether this is less than 4 which is the upper limit value of the number of holdings for the first start port 630 and the right first start port 631 (that is, whether the number of holdings is not stored up to the upper limit). If it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (1104). A holding ball number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the holding number is set (S1105). Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1, which are various counter values, are read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203a of the RAM 203 Each is put on hold (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding hold number of balls (S1106).

  Next, the first prefetch process is executed (S1107). The first pre-reading process (S1107) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 39, but the variation determination result and the variation pattern determined from the respective counter values newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A process of determining the type of stop, etc. is executed.

  Next, for each process from S1108 to S1114, the game ball to the first starting port (the first starting port 630 and the first right starting port 631) executed in each process from S1101 to S1107 is won The only difference is that the process similar to the process performed in this step is a process executed on the second start port 640, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the first look-ahead process (S1107) which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105) will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this first pre-reading process (S1107).

  In the first look-ahead process (FIG. 39, S1107), first, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol storage area 203a. Then, each value of the variation type counter CS1 is read (S1121). The read data is stored in the vacant storage area of the pre-read hold storage area 203x in the area with the smallest winning order (S1122).

  Based on the data stored in the read prefetch hold storage area 203x, the determination result is determined. It should be noted that the success / failure determination result determined here is determined in a case where it is a win in the normal gaming state ST1. Since the variation time is varied and set depending on the number of holdings, the timing for starting the variation cannot be discriminated between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that it is not possible to determine the exact gaming state at the start of the variation. Therefore, the success or failure judgment result can be accurately determined only when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 having the same jackpot judgment value in the high probability gaming state or the low probability gaming state is “7”. Therefore, in the process of S1123, it is determined whether or not it is determined as a win during the normal gaming state ST1.

  In the process of S1123, when it is determined that the success or failure judgment result is a big hit (S1123: Yes), a first winning command is set in which the first special symbol is a big hit and the big hit type is also shown. Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1123 that the success or failure judgment result is out of step (S1123: No), the first winning command is set to indicate that the prefetching result of the first special symbol is out (S1125) . Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball wins a first start port (the first start port 630 or the right first start port 631) and is newly reserved and stored, the stored and stored information is stored in the stored and stored information. Based on the judgment result, the result of judgment of acceptance is judged before the start of fluctuation and notified to the sound lamp control device 113. Accordingly, based on the determination result of the stored hold, the display mode of the holding sphere is changed (for example, the holding sphere is changed in a color different from the normal color) and displayed, or before the change starts. It is possible to execute an effect which indicates the notice symbol etc. and suggests the result of the pass / fail judgment to the player.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of pre-reading, the judgment of success or failure is determined as the normal gaming state ST1, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The game state at the start of variation is accurately determined, and the judgment of success or failure is based on the game state. It may be configured to execute. In this case, instead of varying the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of holding balls, the determination can be made by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of holding balls at the start of the variation. When performing pre-reading, the game state at the start of the change can be determined by determining the change order until the change of the holding ball is started based on the information stored on hold.

  Next, the second look-ahead process (S1114), which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the second prefetch process (S1114).

  The second pre-reading process (FIG. 40, S1114) is based on the fact that the above-described first pre-reading process (FIG. 39, S1107) is won in the first starting port (the first starting port 630 or the first right starting port 631). In contrast to the process of prefetching the hold data in advance and making various determinations, it is a process of prefetching the hold data based on winning in the second start port 640 and making various decisions. Since the same processing is executed only by the difference, the detailed description is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be performed simultaneously. When one of the special symbols is subjected to a variable display that is a big hit or a small bonus, the other special symbol is forcibly displayed to be out of variation. Therefore, the first prefetch process or the second prefetch process described above may be configured to determine whether or not the lottery result is forcibly removed when prefetching. To do this, for example, when prefetching the lottery result of the first special symbol, the period (time) during which the dynamic display of the lottery result to be prefetched is executed is calculated. Then, in the period in which the dynamic display is executed, it may be determined whether or not the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. Note that if the lottery result is out, it will be out regardless of the execution state of the second special symbol, so it may not be determined. Thereby, the processing load due to the above-described determination can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the normal symbol variation process (S106) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time of the motorized role object 632, and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 41, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the middle of the normal symbol (second symbol). (S1201). The middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol) includes the period from when the second symbol display device 83 displays an indication indicating a hit to when the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory 632 is being performed. If it is determined that a normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S 1201: Yes), the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not in contact (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating display (S1202). If it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is in the variable display (S 1202: Yes), it is determined whether the variation time of the normal symbol executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed ( S1222). Here, the fluctuation time is a time set in advance by the processing of S1220 and the processing of S1221, which will be described later, before the variable display is started in the second symbol display unit 88.

  In the process of S1222, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1222: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1222 that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that is variably displayed has elapsed (S1222: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S1223). . In the process of S1223, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S1213, the second symbol display device 83 displays the “○” symbol as a second symbol (lighted display). Set to be On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode at the time of disconnection is set by the processing of S1218, the “x” symbol is displayed as a second symbol on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). It is set to be displayed. When the stop display is set by the processing of S1223, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the display mode set by the processing of S1213 and the processing of S1218. 2 Stop display (lighting display) is performed on the symbol display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S1224). If it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is a hit (S1224: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the motorized steering wheel 632 is set (S1225). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is out (S1224: No), this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1202 that the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S1202: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1203).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S1204). When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S1204: No), the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S1204: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S1205).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1206). In the process of S1206, the data stored in the normal symbol holding 1 to the normal symbol holding 4 of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, normal symbol hold 2 → normal symbol hold 1, normal symbol hold 3 → normal symbol hold 2, normal symbol hold 4 → normal symbol hold 4 and so on in each area. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S1207).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the short time flag 203a2 is ON, that is, whether or not the short time gaming state ST1h or the probability variation gaming state ST3 (S1208). In the process of S1208, when it is determined that the time reduction flag 203a2 is OFF (S1208: No), based on the hit determination value of the second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 15C) for low probability, A yes / no determination result is obtained (S1211). On the other hand, if it is determined that the hour / short flag 203a2 is ON (S1208: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being hit (S1209). If it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being played (S1209: Yes), the processing of S1211 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not a big hit (S1209: No), the hit determination value of the second per random number table 202c (FIG. 15C) for high probability. Based on the result of step S1210, the result of the judgment is obtained (S1210).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (S1212). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is not a hit (that is, it is out) (S1212: No), a display mode of "x" which is a display mode at the time of out is set (S1218). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is a hit (ie, it is a hit) (S1212: Yes), the display mode of "o" which is a display mode at the time of hit is It is set (S1213).

  It is determined whether or not the short time flag 203a2 is on, that is, whether or not the short time gaming state ST1h or the probability variation gaming state ST3 (S1214). In the process of S1214, when it is determined that the time reduction flag 203a2 is OFF (S1214: No), the process of S1217 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hour / short flag 203a2 is on (S1214: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being hit (S1215). If it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being jackpoted, the process of S1216 is executed.

  In the process of S1216, the opening time of the guide members (the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b) of the electric accessory 632 is set to 1 s and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1216). On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot game (that is, the low probability gaming state) in the process of S1215 (S1215: Yes), The blade opening time is set to 0.2 s and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1217).

  It is determined whether the gaming state is in the short time gaming state ST1h (including the probability variation gaming state ST3) (S1219). When it is determined that the time is short (S1219: Yes), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is acquired the value of the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2, and the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (figure 19), and the fluctuation time is determined (S1220). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the usual fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined based on the value of the usual figure fluctuation type counter CS2 from the usual figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 19). As shown in FIG. 19, in the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is set corresponding to each gaming state. Except for the probability variation gaming state ST3 (probability variation: with electric support), there is one variation pattern, and the same variation time is always determined regardless of the value of the selected normal variation variation counter CS2. On the other hand, in the case of the probability variation gaming state ST3, the change time of 3000 ms is determined by the determination value “0 to 190”, and the change time of 30000 ms is determined by the determination value “191 to 198”.

  Thus, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, a variation time longer than in the other cases is selected with a probability of 8/199. When this long fluctuation time is selected, the motorized boat 632 is not activated until the fluctuation time has elapsed. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, when the second starting port 640 is disposed below the electric accessory 632 and the electric accessory 632 is activated, the left starting member 632 a can win the second starting port 640. The flow path is blocked. Therefore, in the meantime, winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 640 is regulated.

  Here, as described above, when the long fluctuation time (30000 ms) of the fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol, the electric character 632 will not operate during that time, so the game is hit during that time About 85% of the balls will win the second starting port 640. Therefore, by selecting a long fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the probability variation gaming state ST3, it is possible to increase the number of winnings to the second starting opening 640.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 16 (c), during the probability variation gaming state ST3, the jackpot D will always be selected when it comes to the second special symbol, and the jackpot is more advantageous than the jackpot with the first special symbol Is selected. Therefore, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, it is possible for the player to take advantage of the case in which the lottery with the second special symbol is a jackpot rather than the lottery with the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an advantageous period by increasing the number of wins on the second starting opening 640 during the probability variation gaming state ST3.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and it is determined whether the gaming ball has passed through the first normal symbol starting opening 67a or the second normal symbol starting opening 67b. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 when there is a passage of the game ball.

  In the through gate passage process (FIG. 42, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (S1301). Here, the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the first normal symbol start opening 67a or the second normal symbol start opening 67b is detected over three timer interrupt processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (S1301: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a normal gaming state (S1302). . In the process of S1302, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal gaming state (S1302: Yes), since the right-handed game is executed in spite of the normal gaming state, the firing abnormality is not detected. The notification command to be shown is set, and the process proceeds to the process of S1304. In addition, when the alerting | reporting command which shows discharge abnormality is set, you may make it complete | finish this process as it is and not perform the lottery of a normal symbol.

  On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the normal gaming state (S1302: No), the process of S1303 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1304. In the process of S1304, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is acquired (S1304). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1305).

  Whether the ball has passed the first normal symbol start opening 67a or the second normal symbol start opening 67b (S1301: No), or the ball passes the first normal symbol start opening 67a or the second normal symbol start opening 67b However, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (S1305: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes the first normal symbol start opening 67a or the second normal symbol start opening 67b (S1301: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1305 : Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S1306). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant holding areas (normal symbol holding 1 to normal symbol holding 4) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203f of the RAM 203 It stores in the area (S1307). In the process of S1307, the value of the normal symbol reservation ball counter 203g is referred to. If the value is 0, the normal symbol reservation 1 area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the normal symbol hold 2 area, if the value is 2, the normal symbol hold 3 area, if the value is 3, the normal symbol hold 4 area first. Area.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1401), and ends the NMI interrupt process. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

  This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 44), first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1501). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1502). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1503).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1504). If it is turned on (S1504: Yes), the process proceeds to S1512. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1504: No), it is further determined whether or not information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1505). (S1505: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, so the process also proceeds to S1512 in this case.

  If the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1505: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1506), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1507: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. Therefore, in this case as well, the process proceeds to S1512. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1512, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1512). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1513, S1514) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the initialization process (S1513, S1514) of the RAM 203 is executed.

  Similarly, initialization processing (S1513, S1514) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1513, S1514), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1513), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1514). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1510.

  On the other hand, since the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1504: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S1505: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) If it is normal (S1507: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1508). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery for transmitting the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side back to the gaming state at the time of the driving power shutoff is transmitted (S1509), and the process proceeds to S1510. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1510). Thereafter, an interrupt is permitted (S1511). Then, the process proceeds to a main process (S1600) described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the main process (S1600) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1600). In the main process (S1600), the process of updating the counter and the process upon power-off are roughly divided.

  In the main process (FIG. 45, S1600), first, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is sent to each sub-side. The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1601).

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1602). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1603) and executed. After the process of S1253 is executed, the probability variation setting process is executed (S1254). The probability variation setting process (S1254) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, but when a big hit A or big hit C is executed, a game ball enters the second specific entrance (not shown). If it is determined that the game has entered, a process for setting data indicating that the game state after the jackpot game is set to the probability-changing game state ST3 is set in the jackpot state setting area.

  When the probability variation setting process (S1254) is executed, the jackpot control process is executed (S1255). The jackpot control process (S1255) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 43, but a process of setting the operations of the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

  After the jackpot gaming process (S1255) is executed, a motorized role opening / closing process is executed (S1256). In this electric accessory opening / closing process (S1256), an opening / closing process of the electric accessory 632 is executed. Thereafter, display control processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1257).

  Next, display control processing of the second symbol (for example, “◯” or “x” symbol) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1258). Briefly, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the value. The variable display of the second symbol is implemented. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory 632 is released for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 receives the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1260). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1260: Yes), the process proceeds to S1251, and the processes after S1251 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1260: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The update of the one initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1261, S1262).

  First, updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1261). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1252 (S1262).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1251 to S1258 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S1256, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1263), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1264). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1265), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1266), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  The processing of S1259 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the change of the state of the game performed in S1251 to S1258, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1261 and S1262 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1251. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1251 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S1301), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1251. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic processing of 4 m second cycle, and the counter updating processing of S1010 and S1011 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing (FIG. 45, S1600), first, output data such as a command stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is executed on the sub side while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) is executed. The external output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) of the above is executed (S1601). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send a prize ball command. Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23) or the start winning process (see FIG. 38) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 46) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1602). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1603). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1604). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1604) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, a motorized product opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motorized product 632 associated with the right first start port 630 (S1605). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S1225 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 41), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S1216, the processing of S1217, and the processing of S1220 in the normal symbol variation processing.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of 1st symbol display apparatus 37A, 37B is performed (S1606). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31, S206), the variation is determined according to the variation pattern. The variable display is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED until the fluctuation time has elapsed. Turn off the light and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, the blue LED And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31) is completed. Stop the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, and stop symbol (first symbol) in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65). ) Is stopped on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (lighted display).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1607). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S1220 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41), the second symbol display device starts the variable display. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. In addition, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the processing of S1223 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 41), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device. The display is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighted display) in the display mode set by the processing of S1212 or the processing of S1223 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 41). ).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1608), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1608: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1609) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1609: Yes), the process proceeds to S1601, and the processes after S1601 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S1609: No), the first main processing is performed until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1610, S1611).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1610). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1602 (S1611).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1601 to S1607 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S1608, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1608: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 43 has been executed, so the processing at the time of the power shutoff after S1612 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1612), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1613). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1614), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1615), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1608 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1601 to S1607, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1610 and S1611 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. The process can be started from S1601. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1601. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1601. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1604) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1604). This jackpot control process (S1604) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 45). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize It is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large open mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a jackpot or a small hit of a special symbol is started (S1621). Specifically, S606 in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 29) or S1006 in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 36) or S624 in the special figure 1 stop processing (see FIG. 30) If the special symbol jackpot or small hit is started, if the special symbol jackpot or small hit start of the special symbol is set, processing of S1024 of special figure 2 off stop processing (see FIG. 37) is executed. judge. In the process of S1621, when a big hit or a small hit of a special symbol is started (S1621: Yes), an opening command is set (S1622), and this process is ended.

  Note that the opening command may be transmitted in a delayed (variable) manner according to the gaming state or the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated periodically (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when the special symbol big hit or small hit is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for big hit A and 5000 for big hit B). In such a case, an opening command may be transmitted. In this way, for example, if a big hit is made in a left-handed game, the time until the start of the big hit is lengthened. Can be shortened. In the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs during the left hitting game, it is necessary to switch to the right hitting game as the big hit game. According to the above configuration, when a big hit is made in a left-handed game, a sufficient time can be secured for switching to a right-handed game (a big hit game). Thereby, the operation burden of the player can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1621, if the special symbol big hit or small hit is not started (S1621: No), it is determined whether the special symbol big hit or small hit is being made (S1623). The special symbol jackpot or small jackpot is being displayed while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game). , During the predetermined time after the end of the special symbol jackpot game. If the special symbol jackpot is not being hit in the processing of S1623 (S1623: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the special symbol is big hit or small hit, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1624). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1624: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1625). The details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1625) will be described with reference to FIG. 47, but the opening to the variable winning device 65 and the probability variable solenoid corresponding to the jackpot type is executed in each round.

  With reference to FIG. 47, the jackpot operation setting process (S1625) which is one process in the jackpot control process (FIG. 46, S1604) will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1625). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 47, S1625), first, an opening scenario in which an opening operation corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds to be started is set is read (S1641). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probable deformation solenoid) 65k (see FIG. 4) is set based on the data read in S1641 (S1642). The opening operation of the open / close door 65f1 (see FIG. 4) of the variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S1641. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  As described above, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at each start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during a big hit game, the big hit game is ended halfway Problems can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of a small hit game, the operation of the probability changing solenoid 65k is not set, and only the opening operation of the open / close door 65f1 is set. In the small hit, it consists of 2 rounds, and in each round, the open / close door 65f1 is opened for 1 second.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1624 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1624: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the open / close door 65f1 and the passage solenoid (probable solenoid) 65k (S1626). When it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1626: Yes), the open solenoid 65f2 is set to ON (S1627). Thereafter, the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1628). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1626 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1626: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1629). The start timing of the ending effect is the end timing of the ending effect when the 15th round is completed and the open / close door 65f1 is closed and a waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) that is a ball thrown time has elapsed. It is determined as If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1629: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1630). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Here, the details of the ending process (S1630) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 48, S1630). In the ending process (FIG. 48, S1630), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set in the voice lamp control device 113 (S1651). Next, it is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203h is on (S1652). In the process of S1652, if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1652), the probability variation flag 203g is set to on (S1653), and the process proceeds to S1654. Although illustration is omitted, the probability change setting flag 203h is configured to be set to off based on the probability change flag 203g being set to on.

  In the processing of S1654, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is a type with electric support (jackpot C) (S1654). When it is determined in the process of S1654 that the jackpot type is the type with the power support (S1654: Yes), the time saving flag 203a2 is set to ON (S1655), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1654 that the jackpot type is not the type with power assistance (big hit C) (S1654: No), the process of S1655 is skipped, and the process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S1652 that the probability change setting flag 203h is off (S1652: No), it is determined whether the jackpot type is the jackpot E (S1656). If it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot E in the processing of S1656 (S1656: Yes), 100 is set in the hour / minute counter 203t (S1657), the processing of S1655 is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1656 that the jackpot type is not the jackpot E, the processes of S1657 and S1655 are skipped, and the process ends.

  Thus, in this embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set on. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the gaming ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 and set the high probability gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the high-probability gaming state (the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 or the probability changing gaming state ST3) until the jackpot game ends. Further, if the game ball can be passed through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, a high probability game state (latent probability change game state ST2 or probability change game state ST3) is given after the jackpot game, so even during the jackpot game A game can be played with an interest in whether the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S1629, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1629: No), the notification process is executed (S1631). Here, the details of the notification process (S1631) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the contents of the notification process (S1631).

  In the notification process (S1631), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is larger than 0 (S1631). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1631: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 13th round (S1632). The determination of the end timing of the 13th round is carried out in the 13th round according to the case where it is detected that 10 balls have been won or it is determined that 30 seconds have elapsed. If it is determined that it is the end timing of the thirteenth round (S1632: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1632 that the end timing of the thirteenth round is not reached (S1632: No), this process is terminated. Here, the counter for 2 seconds is set in S1633, so that the notification counter 203m becomes 0 within 3 seconds of the interval time which is the flash time after the 13th round, and the sound of seeing the liquid crystal is It is output. Therefore, the channel solenoid 65k operates in the 14th round, but since the player can draw attention to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 13th round, the movement of the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is identified, It is possible to suppress the jackpot type being identified by the player. Therefore, the player can play the game expecting that the probability variation gaming state ST3 is provided until the end of the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203m, effects are drawn to draw attention to the liquid crystal across 14th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and from the 13th round It may be executed continuously.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1221, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1661: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by -1 (S1664). It is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m after the update is 0 (S1665). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1665: Yes), a notification command is set (S1666). Thereafter, this process is terminated. In response to the notification command, the audio lamp control device 113 performs setting of an audio output of "seeing liquid crystal".

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 49, S1631) is executed, the winning process is executed (S1632). Here, with reference to FIG. 50, the winning process (S1632) will be described in detail. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process (S1632).

  In the winning process (FIG. 50, S1632), first, it is determined whether or not it is a round effective period (S1671). The round effective period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that it is out of the round effective period (S1671: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1671: Yes), it is determined whether or not the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has passed. If it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a is passed (S1672: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is updated by adding 1 (S1673). Thereafter, the process of S1674 is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not been passed (S1672: No), the processing of S1674 is executed.

  In the process of S1674, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1674). If it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1674: Yes), the closing of the open / close door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1676). Thereafter, the remaining ball timer flag 203 n is set to ON (S1677). Thereafter, the process of S1678 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to be on, it can be determined that the ball is being thrown away after the opening / closing door 203n is closed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1674 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S1675). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1675: Yes), the processing of S1676 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1675: No), the processing of S1678 is executed.

  In the process of S1678, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is a value larger than 0 (S1678). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1678: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by one and updated (S1679). It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1680). If it is determined that the gaming ball has passed the probability variation passage switch 65e3 (S1680: Yes), the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i is updated by adding one (S1681). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1682). Thereafter, the process of S1683 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1680 that the gaming ball has not passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1680: No), the process of S1683 is executed. In the process of S1683, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1683). If it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1684). The probability variation valid flag 203p is set to ON (S1685). Thereafter, this process is terminated. Here, when the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to ON, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 passes the probability variation switch 65e3 even after the switching member 65h is switched, the probability variation game Can be controlled to be set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1678, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1678: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203p is on (S1686). If the probability variation valid flag 203p is off (S1686: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203p is on (S1686: Yes), the probability variation valid timer 203r is incremented by 1 and updated (S1687). It is determined whether the value of the probability variation effective timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in the present embodiment) (S1688). If it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1688: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to off (S1690). The probability variation effective timer 203r is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1690). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1688, when it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1688: No), the process of S1680 is executed.

  Thus, if the probability variation effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the gaming ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3, so the probability variation gaming state ST3 can be set in consideration of the time of ball swelling. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state ST3 from being given by causing the probability variation switch 65e3 to pass the gaming ball illegally.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 50, S1632) is executed, an abnormal process is executed (S1633). Thereafter, this process is terminated. Here, the details of this abnormality process (S1633) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the contents of the abnormality processing (S1633). In the abnormal process (S1633), a process of monitoring whether the probability variation switch 65e3 is illegally passed is executed.

  In the abnormality process (FIG. 51, S1633), first, it is determined whether it is a round effective period (S1701). If it is outside the round valid period (S1701: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1702). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1702: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1703). Thereafter, the process of S1704 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1702: No), the processing of S1704 is executed.

  In the process of S1704, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1704). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1704: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1704: Yes), since it is in the period of the balling time, the remaining ball timer 203o is updated by adding 1 (S1705). The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether the upper limit (3 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1706). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit (S1706: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the upper limit value is determined (S1706: Yes), the number of discharged items (total value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203s) matches the number of wins (value of the number of wins counter 203j) It is determined (S1707).

  If it is determined that they match (S1707: Yes), the processing of S1709 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match (S1707: No), an error command is set (S1708). Thereafter, the process of S1709 is executed. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, displaying a character of the winning number mismatch error) is performed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the illegal act of allowing the game ball to pass through the probability changing switch 65e3 even if the game ball is illegally left in the variable winning device 65 and the jackpot B is set.

  In the process of S1709, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1709), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1710). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharged number counter 203s, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are respectively reset to initial values (S1711), and then this process is ended.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Audio Lamp Control Device 114>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 61, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 52, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S2116 is performed in this startup processing due to an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”) (see FIG. 53). It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S2002). As described later with reference to FIG. 53, the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S2116 when the power-off occurrence information is received from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 53, S2113). The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S2002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S2116 It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, in the specific area of the RAM 223, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written by the process of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 to start initialization of the RAM 223. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S2116, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S2002: Yes), the current start-up process is after a momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process of S2116, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S2006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S2008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-down process of S2116 is executed (see FIG. 53, S2115). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2116 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process of S2116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). The permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S2008 when the power-off flag is turned off is, for example, because the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, via S2004 to S2006 processing of S2008. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010).

  The reason for skipping S2009 clear processing is that when the processing from S2004 to S2006 leads to the processing of S2008, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S2004. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the process of S2101 was performed last time (S2101), and one millisecond If the above has not elapsed (S2101: No), the processing proceeds to S2111 without performing the processing of S2102 to S2110. In the process of S2101, it is the process regarding display (rendering) in S2102 to S2110 that it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, while it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2111 and the variable display setting process of S2112 in a short cycle. Since the process of S2111 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception omission of the command transmitted from main controller 110, and by executing the process of S2111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the variable display effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S2103 to S2112 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S2102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to become the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power on notification process is executed (S2104). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to 114.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S2107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is finished, the lamp editing process is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the process of S2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process of S2108 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S2109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  Thereafter, a command determination process (S2111) for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to S2112. Details of this command determination processing (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2112, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set to transmit the image data, is executed. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S2112 is finished, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2113 (S2113: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S2115), and the power interruption processing is executed (S2116). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S2117), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of the power-off is not stored in the process of S2113 (S2113: No), it is judged based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2114) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2114: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S2111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2111). This command determination process (S2111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Details of the command determination process (S2111) will be described below.

  In the command determination processing (FIG. 54, S2111), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S2201). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for variably displaying the first special symbol. If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is executed to display the first special symbol in a variable manner (S2202). The special figure 1 variation start process (S2202) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 55, but the setting necessary for variably displaying the special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 55, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S2202) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S2202). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 55, S2202), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2241), and the fluctuation pattern type is determined from the received special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command. Extract (S2242). The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) described later. It is used when setting the first special symbol display variation pattern command to notify the control device 114 of the start of the first special symbol variation display effect and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol.

  When the processing of S2242 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a latent probability changing gaming state ST2 (a gaming state without probability changing power support) (S2243). If it is determined that the game state is other than the latent probability change game state ST2 (S2243: No), this process is ended. When it is determined that the game is in the latent probability changing game state ST2 (S2243: Yes), the lottery result of the variation of the first special symbol that starts the variation is a variation that becomes a big hit E (15R normal big hit: 100 electric support). It is determined (S2244). If it is determined that the fluctuation is not the jackpot E (S2244: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation is a big hit E (S2244: Yes), a character indicating the chance zone (see FIGS. 63A and 63B) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2245). ). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, when the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 is entered, in the normal gaming state ST1, the variation time of the second special symbol, which is set to be long for the player and disadvantageous to the player, is set short. On the other hand, in the normal gaming state ST1, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that has mainly played the game is set long. As a result, upon transition to the latent probability change gaming state ST2, the player performs a game such that the game ball wins the second special symbol by hitting the right. However, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously configured to start changing. Here, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, in the second special symbol, a high probability game (probability variation) is always given when the jackpot is reached, but in the first special symbol, a normal probability game (low probability game) is awarded in the first special symbol. May be given by lottery. Therefore, even in the normal gaming state ST1, the first special symbol is a big hit and even if the big hit A (15R probability variable big hit: no electric support) is given, the variation started with the first special symbol after the big hit game is the big hit E As a result, the player immediately shifts to the normal gaming state ST1.

  As described above, the third symbol display based on the start of the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot E in the first special symbol after transitioning to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 in which the game is mainly played with the second special symbol. A chance zone (a notification mode indicating the short time game state ST1 h or the probability change game state ST3) is displayed on the device 81. As shown in FIG. 62 (b), the player displays the heaven zone (notification mode indicating that the game is in the latent probability changing game state ST2) on the third symbol display device 81. It recognizes that the high probability gaming state (probability) is maintained (probable) until the is executed. However, in the chance zone, the player cannot be sure (great expectation) that the probability variation gaming state ST3 will be awarded even after the next jackpot, and may be in the short-time gaming state ST1h (low probability state). A game will be played while recognizing.

  Thus, for example, if the game shifts to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 and the first variation of the first special symbol is a variation that becomes a big hit E, the heaven zone is normally displayed, but the chance zone is displayed. The Rukoto. Thereby, the malfunction which a player becomes discouraged within a short time can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the processing of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (FIG. 55, S2202) is executed, this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2201 that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110. (S2203). Here, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a special symbol indicating a variation display mode for varyingly displaying the second special symbol. If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2203: Yes), a special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204) is executed. Details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 56, the details of the special view 2 fluctuation start process (S2204) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2301), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command ( S2302). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so that it can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) described later. This is used when setting the second special symbol display variation pattern command for notifying the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

  When the process of S2302 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a probability change gaming state ST3 (a gaming state with probability transformation support) (S2203). When it is a gaming state other than the probability variation gaming state ST3 (S2303: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state ST3 (S2303: Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning / non-judgment result of the second special symbol starting to fluctuate is a jackpot (S2304). Here, the determination is performed by determining whether the variation pattern of the jackpot is the variation pattern of the special figure 2 received from the received special figure 2 variation pattern command.

  In the process of S2304, when it is determined that the determination result of the second special symbol that starts to fluctuate is a big win (S2304: Yes), a notice effect command per treasure box is set for the display control device 114 (S2305). . On the other hand, if the result of the determination is wrong, a treasure chest removal notice effect command is set for the display control device 114 (S2306).

  Here, the per-trench box advance notice effect command is a command for instructing the third symbol display device 81 to display the display mode shown in FIG. 10A. In the present embodiment, when transitioning to the probability variation gaming state ST3, a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm as shown in FIGS. In the 2 display area Dn, a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. Here, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol displayed in the second display area Dn is the symbol of the treasure box, and the display mode shown in FIG. 9 (a) and the display mode shown in FIG. 9 (b) Are repeatedly displayed in a short period (for example, every 0.5 seconds), and can be displayed as blinking.

  Here, when the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set, the long deviating variation pattern C (1800000 ms) is selected if the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination is deviating. Therefore, the frequency of the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol extremely decreases. However, when the player wins a small hit with the first special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol in fluctuation is also forcibly stopped and displayed based on the stop of the variation, and is newly stored after the small hit game. The change to the holding ball of the second special symbol being started is started. In this case, the player expects that the variation that becomes a big hit in the second special symbol that is more advantageous than the first special symbol is easily started.

  When the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIGS. 10A to 10B, a treasure box indicating the variation of the second special symbol is enlarged and displayed large in the first display area Dm. . On the other hand, the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn. After that, after the treasure box is displayed in a display mode in which it vibrates for about 2 seconds, the treasure box is opened, and if the result of the judgment is a big hit, “Congratulations” from the treasure box as shown in FIG. Is displayed, and it is informed that the second special symbol is a big hit. Then, a notification mode indicating that the probability variation gaming state ST3 of "chance continuation!" Is continuously executed is displayed.

  In the case where the jackpot D is selected when the jackpot of FIG. 2 is selected in the probability variation gaming state ST3 (that is, the transition to the latent probability varying gaming state ST2), the latency probability variation is selected. It is sufficient to display a notification mode (for example, characters of “heaven zone rush!”) Indicating transition to the game state ST2. In this case, a notification mode for instructing to stop the launch of the game ball “Stop firing!” Should be displayed. Here, instructing to stop the launch is that the game is mainly executed with the first special symbol in the probability variation game state ST3, but the game is mainly performed with the second special symbol in the latent probability variation game state ST2. Set to do. Therefore, the game ball entering the right first start opening 631 and the storage of the holding ball of the first special symbol is a trigger for the player to carry out a drawing that is disadvantageous for the player, so that the firing is stopped. By instructing, the problem can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination is wrong, as shown in FIG. 10A, the display for opening the treasure box is executed in the same manner as the case where the result of determination of success / failure is a big win. The word "Sorry" is displayed to indicate that the determination result is out of order. After that, when 5 seconds have passed after the start of fluctuation, the display mode is switched to the display mode shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, and blinking is executed until the fluctuation time set in the second special symbol has elapsed. Be done.

  Thereby, even if the player has a configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed at the same time, the player pays attention to the second special symbol only for a certain period at the start of the change of the second special symbol, and thereafter Can pay attention to the variation of the first special symbol. Therefore, the game becomes easy to understand, and the player can play the game feeling good.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After executing the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S2203: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S2205). If it is determined that the special view 1 or special view 2 stop type command has been received (S2205: Yes), stop type command reception processing is executed (S2206). This stop type command reception process (S2206) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop type command reception process (S2206). In the stop type command reception process (S2206), first, when a special figure 1 stop type command is received according to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON. When the special view 2 stop type command is received, the special view 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON. (S2311). The stop type (big hit A to big hit E, out of reach, out of reach, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S2312). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can distinguish that it is the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special view 2 stop type command is the second special symbol The types of stop are stored so as to be identifiable.

  It is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 (S2313). When the gaming state is a gaming state other than the normal gaming state ST1, this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 (S2313: Yes), it is determined whether the stop type is a big hit A (15R probability variation big hit: no power support) (S2314). If it is determined that the type of stop is other than the jackpot A (S2314: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type is the jackpot A (S2314: Yes), the first special symbol (special figure 1) pending 1 (the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the earliest digesting order area) ) Is determined as to whether or not the result of determining whether or not the holding ball is a big hit E (15 rounds, normal big hit: 100 times of electric support) (S2315). Here, the jackpot random number value of the corresponding reserved ball notified by the winning command is read from the winning information storage area 223b and determined. Although not shown, the first random number table 202a (FIG. 15A) and the big hit type selection table 202d (FIG. 15A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 are stored in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. 16 (a) to (c)) are stored, and based on the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 given to the winning command output from the main controller 110, The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to determine the result of the determination of the yes / no in the positive variation state.

  In the process of S2315, when it is determined that the first special symbol hold 1 is a determination result other than the jackpot E (S2315: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol hold 1 is a jackpot E (S2315: Yes), the “chance zone entry” character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot game is ending. A display command to be instructed is set in the display control device 114 (S2316). On the other hand, when it is determined that hold 1 of the first special symbol is not jackpot E (S2315: No), as shown in FIG. 62 (a), it is in the heaven zone (latency probability variation gaming state ST2) at the end of jackpot game. A display command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the character “entering heaven zone !!” indicating the transition is output to the display control device 114 (S2317). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when shifting to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, the probability variation gaming continues to be easily set until the big hit gaming is performed at least twice. Therefore, the player can recognize that at least two jackpots have been committed when the characters of the heaven zone are displayed. In addition, since it is configured to be displayed at the end of the big hit game, the player can play in expectation of transition to the latent probability change game state ST2 until the end of the big hit game, improving the interest of the game it can.

  In addition, even if the jackpot A is won in the normal gaming state ST1, if it is determined that the jackpot E wins the first special symbol hold 1 in the latent probability change gaming state ST2, in the jackpot A ending, the short time gaming state ST1h or Since the characters “chance zone entry!” Indicating that the game state is in the probable game state ST3 are displayed, the player does not recognize that the jackpot game has been confirmed to occur at least twice, and the short-time game state ST1h It is possible to play a game by recognizing that it is the probability variation gaming state ST3. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the game has shifted to the latent probability changing game state ST2, and the discouragement of shifting to the time-saving game state ST1h in a short time can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the stop type command reception process (FIG. 57, S2206) is executed, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2205, when it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has not been received (S2305: No), it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110. (S2207). If it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S2207: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the second special symbol reserved ball included in the received reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter e (ie, the number of balls held for the variable display effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main controller 110) is extracted, and the number of balls held for the first special symbol is the voice lamp The number of reserved balls of the second special symbol stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the control device 113 is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d (S2208).

  Here, the held ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins (starts winning) the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631 or the second starting port 640. , Every time there is a start winning, the processing of S2207, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c and the second special symbol holding ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 the first special symbol of the main control 110 It can be adjusted to the values of the holding ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol holding ball counter 203e, respectively. Therefore, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223c or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d of the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Or, even if the value deviates from the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected when a start winning is detected. Then, it can be set to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  If it is determined that the hold ball number command has not been received (S2207: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received (S2209). If it is determined that a winning command has been received (S2209: Yes), winning command processing is executed (S2210). The details of the winning command process (S2210) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing this winning command process (S2210). In the winning command process (S2210), first, the received winning command information is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S2401). Here, the winning information command is configured such that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be identified, and the reservation order (the number of held balls) and the determination result in the normal gaming state ST1 can be determined. ing. Furthermore, the values of various counters acquired at the time of the start winning are also composed of commands that can be determined.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a low probability gaming state (S2402). In the process of S2402, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the low probability gaming state (S2402: No), the process proceeds to S2405. On the other hand, if it is determined that the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state (that is, the probability change is not in progress) (S2402: Yes), whether or not there is information on the probability change jackpot in the winning information storage area 223b provided in the RAM 223. Is determined (S2403). If it is determined in the process of S 2403 that there is no information on the probability variation storage area in the winning information storage area 223 b (S 2403: No), the process of S 2403 and S 2404 is not executed, and the process directly proceeds to the process of S 2405. On the contrary, when it is determined that there is information on the probability variation jackpot in the winning information storage area 223b (S2403: Yes), a notification lottery process (S2404) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2405. The informing lottery process of S2404 will be described with reference to FIG. In the process of S2405, other processes are executed (S2405), and the winning command process is ended.

  Next, the notification lottery process (S2404) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the notification lottery process (S2404). In the notification lottery process (S2405), first, the value of the effect counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 is acquired (S2501). Next, it is determined whether the value of the effect counter 223j is a determination value (S2502). If it is determined in the process of S2502 that the value of the effect counter 223j is not the determination value (S2502: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223 j (counter in the range of 0 to 198) is a determination value (one of “0 to 50” in the present embodiment) (S 2502: Yes), the third A stop display mode command is displayed on the display control device 114 that causes the symbol display device 81 to display the characters "Stop launching !!!", which informs the symbol display device 81 to stop launching the gaming ball (S2503). Exit.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when winning information that is a promising big hit, that is, a big hit A is received in the normal gaming state ST1, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to notify the player to stop firing. Here, when a transition is made from the normal gaming state ST1 to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be short, and the main special gaming method is the game in the second special symbol (the second special symbol is subject to substantial variation). ) However, when the big hit A is won in the normal gaming state ST1, if a holding ball for the first special symbol is stored, a lottery disadvantageous to the player is executed in the first special symbol even during the latent probability changing gaming state ST2. Will be. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the hold for winning the jackpot A is stored in the normal gaming state ST1, the notification for stopping the launch of the game ball is executed by lottery, so that the player can play the game ball at an early timing. Can be stopped, and the winning of the first start opening 630 can be suppressed. In addition, the player can recognize early that the jackpot is A by being notified of the stop of the launch, and can diversify the effects of the game.

  In this embodiment, the game ball launch stop notification is executed by lottery. However, when the big hit A holding ball is stored, it may be configured to be notified.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the winning command process (FIG. 58, S2210) is executed, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that no winning command has been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received (S2211). If it is determined that a status command is received (S2211: Yes), status command reception processing (S2212) is executed. Details of the state command reception process (S2212) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the state command reception process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing status command reception processing (S2212).

  In the state command reception process (S2212), first, based on the state command received from the main control unit 110, it is determined whether there is a change in the gaming state (S2601). The determination as to whether or not the gaming state has been changed is performed by comparing information on the gaming state set in the sub-state setting area 223k with the received gaming state. If it is determined that there is a change in the gaming state (S2601: Yes), the process proceeds to S2602. In the process of S2602, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is to be changed to the normal gaming state ST1 (ie, the time saving gaming state ST1h) (S2602). If it is determined that the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state ST1 (ie, the short time gaming state ST1h) (S2602: Yes), a main display area setting command corresponding to the normal gaming state ST1 is set (S2603). Here, a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and a third symbol (“○ ×” in the present embodiment) corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the second display region Dn. Thus, a display command to be instructed to the display control device 114 is set. A display command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the characters of "lower bounding zone" indicating that the normal gaming state ST1 is made is set in the display control device 114 (S2604). Thereafter, the process of S2612 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2602 that the gaming state has been changed to something other than the normal gaming state ST1 (S2602: No), the gaming state is changed to the latent probability change gaming state ST2 (the gaming state with no definite transformation support). (S2605). If it is determined in the process of S2605 that the gaming state has been changed to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 (S2605: Yes), a main display area setting command corresponding to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 is set (S2606). Here, the display control device 114 is instructed to display the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the first display region Dm and the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the second display region Dn. The display command to be set is set. In addition, a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds, and a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the second sub display area Dt. Ru.

  Next, the first special symbol hold 1 determines from the prize information storage area 223b whether hold information determined by the jackpot E is stored (S2607). When reservation information in which reservation 1 of special figure 1 becomes other than big hit E is stored (S2607: No), the character (refer to Drawing 62 (b)) which shows heaven zone is displayed on the 3rd symbol display 81 The display command to be set is set (S2608). Thereafter, the process of S2612 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol hold 1 is a big hit E (S2607: Yes), a display command is set to display characters indicating the chance zone on the third symbol display device 81 (S2609) . Thereafter, the process of S2612 is executed. By the processing of S2607 and S2609, since the jackpot E occurs immediately after transition to the latent probability change state ST2 and transition to the short time game state ST1 h, the player can be made not to display the heaven zone. Excessive discouragement can be prevented (suppressed).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2605 that the game state has been shifted to a gaming state other than the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 (that is, the positive changing gaming state ST3) (S2605: No), the probability changing gaming state ST3 (a game with positive transformation support The main display area setting command corresponding to (status) is set to the display control device 114 (S2610). Here, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the first display area Dm, and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the second display region Dn (the treasure chest symbol in this embodiment (FIG. 9A)). A display command for instructing the display control device 114 is set so that (see (b)) is displayed.

  Then, a display command for displaying the chance zone characters on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2611). Thereafter, the process of S2612 is executed. In the process of S2612, the state of the gaming state indicated by the received state command is set in the slave state setting area 223k (S2612). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Meanwhile, returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After executing the status command reception process (S2212), it is determined whether or not a notification command has been received (S2213). If it is determined in the process of S2213 that a notification command has been received (S2213: Yes), the voice / lamp notification mode indicated by the received command is set (S2214), and a display corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the received command A command is set (S2215), and this processing ends. By the processing of S2214, for example, based on the notification command indicating the firing abnormality set and transmitted in the above-described through-gate passage processing (see FIG. 42), the notification sound indicating the firing abnormality (“Please turn left!” Sound) is output. Further, by the processing of S2215, for example, based on the transmitted notification command indicating the launch abnormality set in the through-gate passage process (see FIG. 42) described above, a display indicating the launch abnormality (“Please left-hand! Is output to the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in S2213 that the notification command has not been received (S2213: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S2219), and this processing is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the variable display setting process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S2112). This variable display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a display variation pattern command for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is generated, and processing for transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (big hit A to big hit E), processing is performed to set a special display 1 for display or a special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 59, S2112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), since the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, the process of S2705 is performed. Migrate to On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S2701: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S2702).

  Next, in the process of S2703, the change pattern in the change display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 change pattern command in the process of S2203 of the command determination process (FIG. 54, S2111) is displayed in the other memory area of the RAM 223. A variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is generated, which is acquired from 223z (S2703). The display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command for the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration is “10”, it indicates that the first special symbol is supported, and if it is “01”, the second special symbol. It is comprised so that it may respond | correspond to.

  The variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S2703 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 53). Is transmitted to the control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, and the special control pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

  With the setting of the display variation pattern command for the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the retention ball of the first special symbol). When the display is set), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is decreased by 1 (S2704).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2705). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is not on (that is, off) (S2705: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Therefore, the process of S2709 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is on (S2705: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off (S2706). In the process of S2302 of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 55, S2205), the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223. The second variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol is generated (S2707).

  The variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the processing of S2707 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and displayed by the command output processing (S2102) of the main processing (see FIG. 53). Is transmitted to the control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol and receives the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

  With the setting of the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set variation pattern command for display is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the retained ball of the second special symbol) The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is reduced by 1 (S2708).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON (S2709). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i are not set to ON (that is, is OFF) (S2709: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is on (S2709: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is on. If the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set off, and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is on, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set off (S2710). ).

  In the process of S2206 of the command determination process (FIG. 54, S2111), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is set (S2711). When the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 is given a stop type (either 15R probability variation big hit or 15R normal big hit) based on the stop type. A display special figure 1 stop type command for notification is generated. Also, if the set stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, based on the stop type, the display control device 114 the stop type (15R probability variation hit, 15R normal jackpot or not ) Is displayed (S2712). Note that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 is to notify the jackpot type when the jackpot is reached, and is notified even if the judgment result is out of place. Be done. If the determination result is out, the out type is not referred to and the out pattern is set.

  With this configuration, the audio lamp control device 113 controls the display control device 114 so that both the first symbol and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol are simultaneously displayed in a variable manner. Can.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the player can play a game by switching a special symbol that sets a long-time variation time between the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the transition of the gaming state. It was configured to control the special symbols that would be possible. And, in the latent probability change state ST2, since only the jackpot that becomes the high probability gaming state (the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 or the probability changing gaming state ST3) is set to be drawn by the second special symbol awarded at the time of the big hit, Even after the jackpot is executed, the high probability gaming state (latent probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3) is set again. Therefore, for the player, when transitioning to the latent probability change gaming state ST2, the probability change state can be set to be set until at least two jackpots are executed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the jackpot is guaranteed twice when the latent probability changing game state ST2 is entered.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is configured that 85% of the right-handed game balls win the second start opening 640 in a state where the electric accessory 632 does not operate. Furthermore, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, it is set to win a small hit with the second special symbol, and the lottery probability is about 15% of the right-handed game balls as a winning ball for the player as a small hit game. It is set with the probability to be paid out. Therefore, even if the probability change game is set to be low, the operation frequency of the electric role thing 632 is set low (the non-power support state), the game is performed in a state in which the decrease in the ball of the player is suppressed be able to.

  Furthermore, if a big hit is made with the second special symbol from the latent probability changing gaming state ST2, it shifts to the probability changing gaming state ST3 with a probability of 66%. Here, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be long and the variation time of the first special symbol is shortened. Then, when a big hit is made with the first special symbol, either a big hit that is shifted to the probability-changing gaming state ST3 or a big hit that is transferred to the normal gaming state ST1 is awarded by lottery. Therefore, the player can play the game expecting to be able to obtain two jackpots again. In addition, by providing the case where the transition to the normal gaming state ST1 from the probability variation gaming state ST3, it can also be suppressed that the euphoria becomes too high. In the probability variation gaming state ST3, the game may be shifted to either the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 or the normal gaming state ST1 by a jackpot based on the first special symbol. As a result, the player plays the game in anticipation of transitioning from the probability-changing gaming state ST3 to the latent probability-changing gaming state ST2 in which two big hits can be obtained again, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the normal gaming state ST1, when the jackpot with the first special symbol for mainly playing a game, the lottery ratio of the jackpot A to which the latent probability change gaming state ST2 is given is set lower than the lottery ratio of the jackpot B The difficulty of changing to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 can be raised to suppress the increase in gambling.

  In the present embodiment, the game state is switched when the big hit game is executed, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the game state may be switched by the small hit type even when the small hit game is won. You may configure it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the gaming state is switched by configuring the small hit to be drawn more easily than the big hit. Therefore, even when the player is set to a gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to switch to an advantageous gaming state by the winning of the small winning, and the player can be expected to win the small winning. In addition, even when an advantageous gaming state is set, it is possible to switch to a gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player by making a small hit, and it is possible to suppress euphoria.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 65 is an enlarged view of the right area of the game board 13.

  The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the second variable winning device 650 is provided on the upper right side of the game board 13 in the front view and the ball guiding path forming member 70 is on the right side area of the game board 13 in the front view. , The lower right decoration member 71 is provided on the lower right side of the gaming board 13 in front view, and the second starting opening 640 is accompanied by the second ordinary electric role 640 a so as to be viewed from the front of the gaming board 13. A point provided on the side, a point where the first variable winning device 65 is attached to the lower right decorative member 71, and a normal symbol start port (through) instead of the first normal symbol start port 67a and the second normal symbol start port 67b. The difference is that the gate 670 is provided on the lower side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and the right first starting port 631 is deleted. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 64, in addition to the first embodiment, the game board 13 is configured by assembling a ball guide path forming member 70, a lower right decorative member 71, and the like. The first start opening 630, the second start opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, It is fixed by a wood screw etc. from the front side of the game board 13. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. In the following, mainly with reference to FIG. 64, the configuration of the game board 13 added to the first embodiment will be described.

  A through gate 670 is provided on the right side of the game board 13. The through gate 670 is formed of a starting opening having a sensor capable of detecting the passage of the gaming ball in a gate type. When the game ball passes through gate 670, a lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery performed for the game ball passing through the through gate 670, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined.

  When the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80 (refer to FIG. 2). After the symbol “x” is alternately lit for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the normal symbol indicating the lottery result (in the present embodiment, the symbol “◯” or “x”) is stopped (lit).

  If it is determined that the normal symbol is won, the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed with a symbol “◯” indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been won. When the winning symbol is displayed, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a associated with the second starting port 640 operates for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). The second ordinary electric combination 640a is maintained in an upright state so as to restrict the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 640 in a normal state (non-operating state), while the second ordinary electric combination When the object 640a is actuated, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle (40 degrees in this embodiment), and allows the game ball to enter the second start port 640 (special state). ). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out, the symbol “x” indicating that the normal symbol lottery is out is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. At this time, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is not operated, and the next variation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is executed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the entrance to the first start port 630 and the second start port 640, whether or not a big hit is determined (a big hit lottery) is determined, and determination of the big hit type is made Do also. The jackpot type will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 74. As the jackpot type determined here, there are eight types of jackpot types A to H, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It is set (see FIG. 74). These eight types of jackpot types, interval time (1 second or 4 seconds), whether or not V operation, and the presence of power support after the end of the jackpot game (will make it easy to put the second ordinary electric role 640a special state Or not) are set in combination.

  Here, the length of the interval time refers to a predetermined timing (probability change switch) to the first variable winning device 65 provided with a special discharge port (specific area) 65e2 (see FIG. 6) provided with a probability change switch 65e3. It is the length of the interval time set to change whether it is possible or not (easiness or difficulty) to derive at a timing at which 65e3 can pass.

  The detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 80. In this embodiment, the interval time between specific rounds in the jackpot game (the round in which the second variable winning device 650 opens and closes (in this embodiment, 4R) and a timing at which the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 by changing the round time (5R in the present embodiment) in which the first variable winning device 65 performs an opening / closing operation. Whether the game ball can pass to the probability changing switch 65e3 provided in the first variable winning device 65 by the timing when the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 (easy or difficult )) Can be set.

  Whether or not the V operation is possible can pass (probable or difficult) whether or not it is possible to pass the probability changing switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6) in which the gaming ball that has won a prize in the first variable winning device 65 is provided in the special outlet 65e2 (see FIG. If the V operation is possible, the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 is set to be able to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, while the V operation is not possible. In this case, the game ball won in the first variable winning device 65 is set so that it cannot pass (difficult) through the probability changing switch 65e3. Since the detailed contents are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, the description thereof is omitted, but in this embodiment, the operation of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 6) provided in the first variable winning device 65. By controlling V, it is possible to set whether or not the V operation is possible.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the V operation is set is set by driving and controlling the switching member 65h, but it may be set as long as it can set whether or not the gaming ball can pass the probability change switch 65e3. A lid member that is driven to open and close at regular intervals is provided on the upstream side of the passage having the probability change prize switch 65e3, and a stopper member that retains the game ball is provided further upstream of the lid member. A configuration may be used in which the game ball can pass through the probability change prize winning switch 65e3 only when the timing at which the stopper member is released matches the timing at which the lid member is opened. By using such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to grasp that the lid member is regularly opened, and the player is allowed to win a game ball in the first specific winning opening 65. If this is the case, it can be assumed that there is a possibility of passing through the probability change switch 65e3, and the motivation of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, by changing the opening time (opening timing) of the lower attacker (opening / closing door) 65f1 that opens the first specific winning opening 65a, it is difficult for the game ball to win in the first variable winning device 65, It may be possible to set whether or not the sphere can pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

  The presence or absence of power support is used to set whether or not the second ordinary electric power role 640 a is shifted to a special state (power support state) after the big hit game is over.

  In the present embodiment, eight types of jackpot A to jackpot H are set as jackpot types of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) as in the case of the first special symbol (see FIG. 74).

  Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged as variable winning devices that are operated in an open state during the big hit game. The first variable winning device 65 is provided on the lower side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 64), and in a specific round during the jackpot game (the fifth round in the present embodiment), the first specific winning port 65a has a predetermined period ( In this embodiment, it is operated to be released until 29 seconds) or a predetermined number (10 balls in this embodiment) of game balls enter (see FIG. 80B).

  On the other hand, the second variable winning device 650 is provided on the upper side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 64), and rounds other than the specific round during the jackpot game (1st to 4th rounds and 6th to 7th rounds in this embodiment). The second specific winning opening 650a is operated so as to be opened until a predetermined period (30 seconds in this embodiment) or a predetermined number (10 balls in this embodiment) of game balls enter.

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. On the right side of the game board 13, a ball guide path forming member 70 for guiding a game ball launched by a right-handed game is assembled to the surface of the game board 13 with screws. The ball guiding path forming member 70 has an opening 70a that is an opening through which a game ball launched by a right-handed game can pass, and a plurality of guides that guide the game ball that has passed through the opening 70a to meander and flow down. Members (first guide member (first guide surface) 70b, second guide member (second guide surface) 70c, third guide member (third guide surface) 70d), and a game ball flowing down the third guide member 70d The discharge unit 70 e from which the air is discharged is assembled and configured as one unit.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a problem that the positional relationship between the position where the game ball passes (the position of the opening 70a and the discharge portion 70e) and the member (each guiding member) for guiding the game ball is deviated. In addition, it is possible to suppress the problem that the positional relationship between the guide members is shifted, and there is an effect that the manufacturing efficiency can be increased in the process of manufacturing the pachinko machine 10.

  Below the ball guiding path forming member 70, a lower right decorative member 71 including the first variable winning device 65 is assembled to the surface of the game board 13 with a screw. The lower right decorative member 71 is a fourth guiding member (fourth guiding surface) 71a for receiving gaming balls rolled on the third guiding member 70d of the ball guiding path forming member 70, and a first variable winning device 65; The decorative portion 71 b is assembled as one unit.

  The decoration portion 71b is provided with a decoration lamp (light emitting means) (not shown) so that it can be emphasized that the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is open during the big hit game. Has been. Specifically, the surface of the decoration portion 71b (the surface that can be visually recognized by the player) is formed of a half mirror, and when the decoration lamp is turned off, the inside of the first variable prize winning device becomes difficult to visually recognize. When the winning opening 65a is opened, the decoration lamp is turned on so that the inside of the first variable winning device can be visually recognized.

  By this configuration, the player can easily notice that the player is in the gaming state aiming at the first specified winning opening 65a, and the state in which the player is not playing or the normal gaming state (during the jackpot game) In a gaming state that is not, it is possible to prevent (difficult) the player from seeing (difficult) the structure in the first variable prize-winning device 65, so that an illegal act (for example, a dedicated jig in the first specific prize-winning port 65a) There is an effect that it is difficult to perform the action of changing the switching member, etc.) by inserting

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. A ball guiding path 72 is formed in the right region of the game board 13 by the ball guiding region forming member 70 and the fourth guiding member 71a described above. The ball guiding path 72 is configured such that a game ball meanders, and a specific configuration will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 65 is an enlarged front view of the right area of the game board 13. Here, the flow of gaming balls in the ball guiding path 72 will be described. First, the game ball that has passed through the opening 70a is received by the first guide member 70b. The first guide member 70b is assembled so as to be inclined toward the lower right direction when the game board 13 is viewed from the front, and the game ball flows down (rolls) on the first guide member 70b in the lower right direction. The lower end portion of the first guide member 70b is assembled so as to face the second guide member 70c, and the game ball flowing down the first guide member 70b falls on the second guide member 70c.

  The second guide member 70c is assembled so as to be inclined toward the lower left direction when the game board 13 is viewed from the front, and the game ball flows down (rolls) on the second guide member 70c in the lower left direction. The lower end portion of the second guide member 70c is assembled so as to face the third guide member 70d, and the game ball that has flowed down the second guide member 70c falls onto the third guide member 70d.

  The third guiding member 70d is assembled so as to be inclined toward the lower right in the front view of the game board 13, and the gaming ball flows down (rolls) on the third guiding member 70d in the lower right. The flowing lower end portion of the third guiding member 70d is assembled so as to face the fourth guiding member 71a, and the gaming ball having flowed down the third guiding member 70d passes through the discharge portion 70e and is placed on the fourth guiding member 71a. Fall down.

  The fourth guiding member 71a is attached to the game board 13 so as to be inclined toward the lower left as viewed from the front of the game board, and the gaming balls flow downward in the lower left direction on the fourth guiding member 71a (rolling ). The lower end portion of the fourth guiding member 71a is configured to communicate with the opening / closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 6) of the first variable winning device 65, and when the first specific winning port 65a is in the closed state, the fourth guide The game ball that has flowed down the member 71a flows down (rolls) on the open / close door 65f1, and is discharged to the lower region of the game board 13 (the region where the through gate 670 and the second start port 640 are disposed). Configured

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball guiding path 72 is configured such that the gaming ball meanders, so the time required for the gaming ball to pass through the ball guiding path 72 (guide path passing time) is meandered. It becomes possible to set longer than the case of not doing.

  Furthermore, each of the guide members constituting the ball guide path 72 is configured such that the inclination angle becomes smaller in order from the upstream side. Specifically, the first guide member 70b and the second guide member 70c are set to about 20 degrees, the third guide member 70d is set to about 10 degrees, and the fourth guide member 71a is set to about 5 degrees.

  With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the flow velocity of the game ball on the downstream side of the ball guiding path 72, and the opening and closing that communicates with the rolling surface of the fourth guiding member 71a on the fourth guiding member 71a. A plurality of gaming balls can be retained (rolled) simultaneously on the door 65f1.

  Therefore, it is possible to win a plurality of game balls in a short period when the first specific winning opening 65a is opened.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the gaming balls are configured to fall on the inclined surface which is inclined in the direction opposite to the flow-down direction between the induction members, the flow-down speed of the game balls can be efficiently reduced. Is possible.

  In the present embodiment, in order to simultaneously hold (roll) a plurality of game balls on the downstream side of the ball guide path 72, the inclination angle of the guide member is relaxed and the flow down speed of the game balls is reduced. However, other configurations may be adopted. For example, a material (urethane or the like) having a high coefficient of friction may be attached to the game ball rolling surface of the induction member to reduce the flow-down speed of the game ball. Further, the guide member (fourth guide member 71a) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path 72 and the game ball rolling surface of the open / close door 65f1 meander in the depth direction (horizontal direction) when the game board 13 is viewed from the front. May be. Even if such a configuration is adopted, the same effect can be achieved.

  In the present embodiment, in order to prevent a step from occurring between the guide surface of the fourth guide member 71a and the surface (guide surface) of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65, the fourth guide is provided. The member 71 a is provided on the lower right decorative member 71 which is configured separately from the ball guiding path forming member 70. By configuring in this way, for example, when the ball guide path configuration of the pachinko machine 10 is adopted with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in which the shape of the first variable winning device 65 is slightly changed, the fourth guide member 71a By changing the first variable winning device 65 to a shape corresponding to the shape of the first variable winning device 65, it is possible to divert the ball guiding path forming member 70. That is, there is an effect that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Next, the opening 70a of the ball guiding path 72 described above is located below the second variable winning device 650, and the second specified winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is open (the attacker 650b is open) In the operating state, the gaming ball can not pass through the opening 70a (is difficult).

  Further, although the detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, in the present embodiment, during a period (opening period, interval period) for closing the second specified winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 during the jackpot game. By changing the length, the first variable winning device at the timing when the gaming ball having passed the ball guiding path 72 can pass the probability changing switch 65e3 by the operation of the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 It is configured to be able to control whether or not to win 65.

  In the present embodiment, two variable winning devices are vertically separated from each other, and a ball guiding path 72 is provided between them (in the path where the game ball flows down) to provide an upper variable winning device (second variable winning device). The winning ball 650) has been configured to delay the time for a game ball that has passed without winning a prize to reach the lower variable winning device (first variable winning device 65). Other configurations may be used. For example, a plurality of variable winning devices may be provided in the left-right direction, and the ball guiding path 72 may be provided therebetween.

  Also, the plurality of variable winning devices and the ball guiding path 72 between them may be assembled as one unit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate the assembling work to the game board 13 and to improve the manufacturing efficiency.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the ball guide path 72 uses a configuration in which the game ball is meandered in the left-right direction of the gaming board, but if it is a configuration that allows the game ball to pass the ball guide path 72 for a predetermined time or more, Other configurations may be used. For example, the configuration may be such that the path meanders in the depth direction (horizontal direction) when viewed from the front of the game board 13, or the configuration may mean that the game ball meanders in three dimensions using both the left and right directions and the depth direction.

  In the present embodiment, the distance that the game ball flows down is the time for the game ball to pass through the right area of the game board 13 (the time during which the game ball flows down from the second variable winning device 650 to the first variable winning device 65). It is realized to extend for a predetermined time or more by using a configuration for extending the game time or a configuration for delaying the speed at which the game ball flows down, but other methods may be used. For example, a regulating member that regulates the flow of the game ball is provided in the ball guiding path 72, and the time for the game ball to pass through the ball guiding path 72 by electrically driving the regulating member at regular intervals or at regular intervals. You may make it the structure made into predetermined time or more. By using the electrically driven regulating member in this way, it is possible to more reliably set the time for passing through the ball guiding path to be a predetermined time or more.

  In the second embodiment, the game ball is difficult to win at the first start port 630 during the right-handed game. However, the first start port is located in the right area of the game board 13 as in the first embodiment. 631 may be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the flow of setting various game states in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a flow of setting various gaming states. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a limit (100 times) to the number of times of charge assistance provided in the probability variation gaming state ST3 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above and a flow in which various gaming states are set Is different. The other configurations are the same, so the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the transition ratio between the high-probability gaming state or the low-probability state after the jackpot game is ended, the special symbol type (two types of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) and the gaming state (normal gaming state). It is different from the first embodiment described above in that a total of eight types can be set by combinations of ST1, short-time gaming state ST1h, latent probability varying gaming state ST2, and probability varying gaming state ST3. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  First, the flow of setting various gaming states in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 66. FIG. In the normal game state ST1, first, a left-handed game is performed aiming at a first starting port 630 (see FIG. 64) provided at the lower center of the game board 13. During the normal gaming state ST1, the first special symbol is substantially subject to variation. Specifically, in the normal gaming state ST1, variation of 8000 ms (8 seconds) to 30 000 ms (30 seconds) as variation time of the first special symbol game Time is selected, and 600000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol game (see FIG. 76). By configuring in this way, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol start to change at the same time in the normal gaming state ST1, the first special symbol is not changed until the second special symbol ends one change. Since the symbol can be changed a plurality of times (minimum 20 times in the present embodiment), the first special symbol can be made a substantial change target.

  Then, during the normal gaming state ST1, when the jackpot in the first lottery game of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the jackpot B (7R normal jackpot: no electric support) and the jackpot D (7R normal jackpot: electric support Yes And jackpot E (7R probability variation jackpot: electricity support) and jackpot H (7R hit normally: electricity support absent) are selected.

  Here, when winning a big hit in the first lottery game during the normal gaming state ST1, the probability of transitioning to the high probability gaming state (latency probability changing gaming state ST2 or probability changing gaming state ST3) after the big hit is set to 50% And the probability of transitioning to the low probability state (normal gaming state ST1 or short time gaming state ST1h) is set to 50%, and when the jackpot B, D, H is won in the first lottery game, after the jackpot game is over When the normal gaming state ST1 is set again and the jackpot E is won in the first lottery game, the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set after the jackpot game ends.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the jackpot probability does not shift to a high probability unless the game ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game as described above in the first embodiment. Even if the jackpot is won in the lottery game, if the game ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the probability change gaming state ST3 is not set, and the probability hit of probability change gaming state ST3 (high probability: presence of electricity support) When the probability becomes a low probability, transition to the short game state ST1 h (low probability: with power support) will be made.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, even if the same jackpot type is won, the jackpot game according to the result of the game during the jackpot game (the result of whether or not passing through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game) The game state to shift after the end may be different, but when explaining the flow to set various game states, the game state that can be transitioned by the jackpot type (transition by playing the game normally The game state is described as a transition destination after the end of the jackpot game.

  In the normal gaming state ST1, if the second lottery game is performed, it is set so as not to shift to the high-probability gaming state after the jackpot game ends and to shift to the 100% low-probability state (see FIG. 74). ). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the second lottery game from being performed illegally during the normal game state ST1.

  Next, the probability variation gaming state ST3 that shifts with a probability of 50% when a big win is won in the first lottery game during the normal gaming state ST1 will be described. In the probability variation gaming state ST3, a right-handed game in which a second starting opening 640 (see FIG. 64) provided on the right side of the gaming board 13 is aimed is performed. During the probability variation gaming state ST3, the second special symbol is subject to substantial variation. Specifically, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, a variation time of 600000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol game, It is comprised so that 500 ms (0.5 second) may be selected as a fluctuation time of a 2nd special symbol game (refer FIG. 78). Thus, by making the variation time of the first special symbol longer and making the variation time of the second special symbol shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, it becomes possible to make the second special symbol subject to substantial variation. .

  And if it becomes a jackpot in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the probability variation gaming state ST3, the jackpot E (7R: high probability: charge support) and the jackpot F (7R: high probability: Either power support none) or jackpot G (7R: low probability: with power support) is selected.

  Here, when the jackpot is won in the second lottery game during the probability variation gaming state ST3, the probability of transitioning to the high probability gaming status (latency probability variation gaming status ST2 or probability variation gaming status ST3) after completion of the jackpot is set to 70% And the probability of transitioning to the low probability state (normal gaming state ST1 or short time gaming state ST1h) is set to 30%, and if the jackpot E is won in the second lottery game, a probability variation gaming state after the jackpot game is over When ST3 is set again and the jackpot F is won in the second lottery game, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set after the jackpot game ends. Then, when the jackpot G is won in the second lottery game, the time saving game state ST1 h is set.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the electric support is ended when the total number of fluctuations of the first lottery game and the second lottery game in the probability variation game state ST3 reaches 100. Therefore, when the special symbol variation exceeds 100 times in the probability variation gaming state ST3, the process shifts to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2.

  In the probability variation gaming state ST3, if the first lottery game is temporarily performed, the percentage to shift to the high probability gaming state after the big hit game is set to 10%, the percentage to shift to the low probability state after the big hit game is finished Is set to 90% (see FIG. 74).

  Next, a latent probability change gaming state ST2 that shifts at 10% when winning a big hit in the second lottery game in the probability change gaming state ST3 will be described. In the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, a right-handed game is performed aiming at the second starting opening 640 (see FIG. 64) provided on the right side of the gaming board 13. During the latent probability changing game state ST2, the second special symbol is subject to substantial variation. Specifically, in the latent probability varying gaming state ST2, a variation time of 600000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol game. , 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is selected as a variation time of the second special symbol game (see FIG. 78). As described above, the second special symbol can be substantially varied by changing the variation time of the first special symbol and shortening the variation time of the second special symbol than the variation time of the first special symbol. .

  And, if it becomes a big hit in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the latent probability change gaming state ST2, the big hit E (7R: high probability: with electric support) and the big hit F (7R: high probability) : Any of power supply support is selected.

  Here, when the jackpot is won in the second lottery game during the probability variation gaming state ST3, the probability of transitioning to the high probability gaming status (latency probability variation gaming status ST2 or probability variation gaming status ST3) after completion of the jackpot is set to 100% Is set not to shift to the low probability state (normal gaming state ST1 or time saving gaming state ST1h), and when winning a big hit E in the second lottery game, a probability variation gaming state after the end of the big hit game When ST3 is set and the jackpot F is won in the second lottery game, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set again after the jackpot game ends.

  Next, the time saving game state ST1h will be described. In the short time game state ST1h, a left hitting game is performed aiming at the first start opening 630 (see FIG. 64) provided in the center of the game board 13. During the short time gaming state ST1h, the first special symbol is subject to substantial fluctuation, and specifically, in the short time gaming state ST1h, the fluctuation time of 600000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol game, 1) It is comprised so that 1000 ms (1 second)-30 000 ms (30 seconds) may be selected as fluctuation time of a special symbol (refer FIG. 77). As described above, the second special symbol can be substantially varied by changing the variation time of the first special symbol and shortening the variation time of the second special symbol than the variation time of the first special symbol. .

  And, when it becomes a big hit in the first lottery game of the first special symbol (special figure 1) during the short time gaming state ST1h, the big hit A (7R: low probability: no charge support) and the big hit C (7R: low probability: One of the jackpot E (7R: high probability: with electric support) and jackpot F (7R: high probability: without electric support) is selected (see FIG. 75).

  Here, when the jackpot is won in the first lottery game during the short time game state ST1h, the probability of transitioning to the high probability game state (latency probability change game state ST2 or probability change game state ST3) after the big hit is set to 95% And the probability of transitioning to the low probability state (normal gaming state ST1 or short time gaming state ST1h) is set to 5%, and if the jackpots A and C are won in the first lottery game, usually after the jackpot game is over If the gaming state ST1 is set and the jackpot E is won in the first lottery game, the probability change gaming state ST3 is set after the jackpot game is ended, and if the jackpot F is won in the first lottery game, the jackpot game is ended The latent probability changing game state ST2 is set.

  Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 75, the short-time gaming state ST1h is provided with electric support, and in the gaming state in which the second ordinary electric accessory 640a associated with the second starting port 640 is likely to be in a special state. Although there is, as described above, during the short time game state ST1h, the first special symbol is a substantial change target, and the change of the second special symbol is a long change, so during the short time game state ST1h, the second starting opening A game aimed at 640 becomes a very inefficient game. In addition, since the second starting port 640 is set to one game ball, even if a game is performed in which a right-handed game is played during the short-time gaming state ST1h and a game ball is awarded to the second starting port 640. There is no increase in the number of balls to be played. Therefore, in the short-time game state ST1h, the same game as the normal game state ST1 (left-handed game) is performed.

  The flow of setting various game states of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has been described above. Here, the main game characteristics (transition of various game states) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. Do.

  First, in the normal gaming state ST1, the jackpot E is won in the first lottery game to aim for the probability variation gaming state ST3 (50% distribution). Next, the probability variation game state ST3 wins the jackpot F while performing the second lottery game and aims at the latent game state ST2 (distribution 10%). Alternatively, a special symbol game is performed 100 times without making a big hit, and the power support is ended to aim to shift to the latent game state ST2.

  In the probability variation gaming state ST3, since the jackpot where the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set again after the end of the jackpot game occupies 60% of the entire jackpot, to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 while acquiring the balls due to the jackpot It will aim to migrate.

  In addition, the probability variation game state ST3 is configured to win a small hit as a lottery result of the second lottery game, and to play a game without reducing the number of balls by playing the small hit game.

  Next, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, after the jackpot game is over, the jackpot in which the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set again accounts for 90% of the total jackpot. The latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is a gaming state where the player can expect the most out of the balls in the pachinko machine 10. The detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 80, but the latent probability changing game state ST2 is configured to be able to acquire more balls than the probability changing game state ST3 by repeatedly performing the small hit game. . That is, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, it is possible to increase the number of balls in the small hit game and the big hit game, and the same mode is repeated (looped) with a probability of 90% after the big hit game ends. It is configured.

  Further, in the latent probability changing gaming state ST2, the high probability gaming state transition rate of the second lottery game is 100%, and even if the remaining 10% is won instead of the 90% looping the latent probability varying gaming state ST2, It only shifts to the gaming state ST3. That is, in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, the jackpot can be won in the high probability gaming state at least twice (ST2 → ST3 and ST3 → ST1h twice).

  Lastly, the short-time gaming state ST1h is a gaming state that is set when a transition is made from a high probability state to a low probability state (falling down), and the number of changes in the special symbol is a predetermined number of times (100 in this embodiment). It is a game state where power support is given until it becomes). At this time, the short game state ST1 is set to have a high rate of transition to the high probability game state after the big hit end than the normal game state, and is high when winning the first lottery game during the short time game state ST1. The rate of transition to the probabilistic gaming state is set to 95% (the probability variation gaming state ST3 is 70% and the latent gaming state ST2 is 25%). And, when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, it moves to normal game state ST1.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and gaming state (normal gaming state ST1, short time gaming state ST1 h, latency probability changing gaming state ST2, probability changing gaming state ST3) Based on the configuration, it is possible to set a plurality of ratios to shift to the high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is finished, and further, it is configured to be able to change a special symbol that is a substantial variation target according to the gaming state, so in the normal gaming state ST1 When the second lottery game that is not a target for substantial variation is performed, it is possible to extremely reduce the rate of transition to the high probability gaming state (0% in this embodiment). By configuring in this manner, even if an improper game (illegal game) is performed, the game does not shift to a state advantageous to the player (high probability gaming state), so an illegal game targeting the pachinko machine 10 is There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the substantial change target of the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 which is the high probability gaming state is the second lottery game in which the second special symbol varies, and during the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, the lottery result of the second lottery game is a big hit In such a case, since it is configured to shift 100% to the high probability gaming state, it is possible to make a big hit state with the high probability gaming state at least twice in a part of the high probability gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine rich in gaming properties, and there is an effect that the interest of the gaming machine can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the flow of control of various devices during the jackpot of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a timing chart showing the flow of various devices executed from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game. Of the operation control of various devices, the description of the same operation control as that of the first embodiment described above is omitted, and the details of the other operation control will be described later with reference to FIG.

  First, when the big hit game is started, the main control device 110 operates various devices related to the big hit game (first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650) a predetermined number of times at predetermined timing (see FIG. 80). Then, based on various commands output from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 executes an effect display corresponding to the big hit game on the third symbol display device 81.

  First, when the jackpot game is started, an attacker (upper attacker) 650b is opened (turned on) to open the second specified winning opening 650b of the second variable winning device 650 after a predetermined period t1 (opening period) has elapsed. ). The attacker (upper attacker) 650b is closed when either a predetermined period (29 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed or a predetermined number of winnings (10 in the present embodiment) is satisfied. The period t2 in which the second specified winning opening 650b is in the open state is defined as one open period (round), and is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times (seven times in this embodiment) in one jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, the second specified winning opening 650a is always open during the opening period t2, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the second specified winning opening may be closed during the opening period. The upper attacker 650b may be operated to repeat the state. Even in the case of using such a configuration, the opening period t2 is set when the predetermined period has passed or the predetermined number of winnings are satisfied after the second specific winning opening is first opened. It will end.

  Then, the next round is started after a predetermined period t3 (interval period) elapses after one round is completed. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, a game is executed in which the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device is opened from the first round to the fourth round. A game is executed in which the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened.

  Next, the flow between the fourth round and the fifth round will be described, in which the specific winning opening that is open during the big hit game is switched from the second specific winning opening 650a to the first specific winning opening 65a. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that a predetermined period t4, which is a specific interval period between the fourth and fifth rounds, can be changed according to the gaming state (see FIG. 80). For example, the jackpots A to D have the interval period set to 1 second, and the jackpots E to H have the interval period set to 4 seconds.

  Here, the influence on the game by changing the specific interval period will be described. First, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a game ball launched by a right-handed game aiming at the right side of the game board 13 passes through the second variable winning device 650 in a closed state, and then guides the ball. By passing the path 72, the first specified winning opening 65a is configured to be able to win (see FIG. 64). The ball guiding path 72 is designed to have a ball guiding path transit time of 3 to 4 seconds.

  In addition, the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 operates in a mode in which the game ball can pass the probability changing switch 65e3 at the same time as the first specified winning opening 65a is opened (the attacker 65b is on) (V The opening operation is controlled to be on, and the mode (V opening operation is on) is continued for a predetermined period t5 (two seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined period (V opening period) t5 has elapsed The sphere is controlled so as to operate in a manner in which it cannot pass (difficult) through the probability change switch 65e3 (V opening operation is off).

  That is, in the jackpot game of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to pass the gaming ball to the probability change switch 65e3, a V obtained by adding a specific interval period t4 and a period (two seconds) t5 of V open operation on The effective period t6 needs to be longer than the ball guidance route passage period (in the present embodiment, up to 4 seconds). Specifically, by setting the specific interval period t4 to 4 seconds, the V effective period t6, which is the sum of the specific interval period t4 (4 seconds) and the V open period t5 (2 seconds), is set to 6 seconds. Make it longer than the route passage period (maximum 4 seconds). By configuring in this manner, the game ball that has passed the ball guiding path 72 after the fourth round upper attachment 650a is turned off (after the game ball can pass through the ball guiding path 72) is V-effective. It is possible to win a prize in the first specified winning combination opening 65a within the period t6, and to allow passage of the probability change switch 65e3.

  On the other hand, if V effective period t6 is set shorter than the ball guidance route passage period, it becomes possible (impossible) to make a game ball to win the first specified winning opening 65a within V effective period t6. .

  Thus, in this embodiment, the jackpot game that can substantially pass V without changing the operation control of the first variable winning device 65 by changing the length of the specific interval period t4 according to the gaming state. And V has made it possible to provide a non-passable (hard) jackpot game. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the main control device 110 in the big hit game can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as described in the first embodiment described above, the operation control of the first variable winning device 65 (switching member 65h) according to the type of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) (Operation control that allows the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 and operation control that cannot pass (difficult)) and set the length of the specific interval period t4 according to the gaming state when winning the jackpot Configured to set.

  In this embodiment, as described in the first embodiment, the operation content of the switching member 65h is changed, so that an operation pattern that allows the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (easy) and a non-passage. Although it is configured to set a possible (difficult) operation pattern, the game ball can pass the probability change switch 65e3 by changing the open pattern of the open / close door (lower attacker) 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 An (easy) operation pattern and an impassable (hard) operation pattern may be set.

  Specifically, first, when a round (five rounds in this embodiment) in which the first variable winning device 65 is in an open state is started, the switching member 65h is turned on for 2 seconds. That is, when the gaming ball wins at the timing when the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is in the open state, the switching member 65h so that the gaming ball can pass (probably) through the probability change switch 65e3. Drive. Then, the opening / closing door opening pattern (for example, the opening pattern for continuously opening for 29 seconds) is possible (easily) that the game ball can win a prize in the first specified winning opening 65a (for example, the opening pattern opened continuously) The opening / closing door opening pattern in which the game ball cannot be won (difficult) is configured to be changeable (for example, an opening pattern in which 0.4 second opening is repeated five times from the start of five rounds and then continuously opened for 27 seconds).

  With such a configuration, an operation pattern that allows the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (easy) and a non-passing pass only by changing the opening pattern of the door 65f1 without changing the operation content of the switching member 65h. Possible (hard) operation patterns can be set. Therefore, it is possible to set a plurality of ratios of jackpot games that can pass the probability change switch 65e3 substantially, to provide various playability to the player, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game .

  In addition, by changing the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 65f1, a state in which a game ball can enter the first specific winning opening 65a (easy) and a game ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 65a (difficult) In the case of using a configuration that enables setting of the state of the machine, the timing for starting the driving of the switching member 65 is not limited to the timing for starting the driving of the first variable winning device 65, for example, the pachinko machine 10 At the timing when the power is turned on, operation control may be performed so as to always repeat a constant operation.

  Furthermore, by changing the opening pattern of the open / close door 65f1, the gaming ball can enter the first specified winning opening 65a (easily) and the gaming ball can not enter the first specified winning opening 65a (difficult) By using the configuration that allows setting of the above state, it is possible to set the on-operation period of the switching member 65h longer than 2 seconds. As a result, the gaming ball having entered the first specified winning combination opening 65a can pass the probability variation switch 65e3 more reliably.

  In the present embodiment, the specific interval period t4 is changed to change whether or not the game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V effective period. The configuration may be adopted. For example, the ball guidance path passage time, which is the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball guidance path 72, may be switched. Alternatively, the value of the V effective period t6 may be changed by changing the value of the V open period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the fifth round of the big hit game, for example, the first variable winning device 65 of the first round In the case of a big hit game in which the first specified winning opening 65a is in the open state, the period to be changed according to the gaming state may be the opening period t1.

  By configuring in this way, for example, by setting the time obtained by adding the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 longer than the ball guiding path passing time, the jackpot game starts (the opening period t1 starts) and the right The hit game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V effective period t6 and can pass through the probability changing switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the sum of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball guidance path passing time, the game ball that is hit right by the start of the big hit game is the first within the V effective period t6. It is impossible (difficult) to win the first specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65.

  Specifically, the open / close door 65f1 (see FIG. 6) that operates to open the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is operated a plurality of times within one round, and (The first specific winning opening 65a is configured to repeat the open state and the closed state in one round). The gaming ball that has won when the specific winning opening 65a is first opened is the probability change switch 65e3. It is good to comprise so that it can pass. In addition, the open / close door 65f1 that operates to open the first specified winning opening 65a is composed of a plurality of members that perform different predetermined movements, and only when the plurality of members perform a specific operation The mouth may be open.

  By using the specific configuration described above, even when a jackpot game with a short opening period t1 (a jackpot game in which a game ball cannot pass through the probability changing switch 65e3 (difficult) is set), an open state (within one round) Since the game ball is won in the specific winning opening of the second open state of the game, there is an effect that the player does not feel discomfort.

  Returning to FIG. 67, the description will be continued. When the open / close door (lower attachment) 65f1 (not shown) is turned off (end of the fifth round) and the first specified winning opening 65a is closed, the upper attachment 650b is turned on after the interval period t3 (second The specific winning opening 650a is open). Thereafter, the action of the upper attacker 650b is repeated until the final round (seven rounds) is finished, and after the second specified winning opening 650a of the final round (seven rounds) is closed, the ending period t7 is passed and the jackpot game is performed. finish.

  In the third symbol display device 81, while the big hit game is being performed, the effect display corresponding to the big hit game is executed. Specifically, an effect display (effect A) is performed to congratulate that the jackpot game early became a jackpot game, and then, it is informed that the specific winning opening to be opened in the next round is switched, and the jackpot An effect display (effect B) is executed to notify (suggest) that a game is to be performed to determine whether or not to shift to the high probability gaming state after the end of the game. And the effect display (effect C) asking whether or not to shift to the high probability gaming state is executed, and the gaming state provided after the end of the big hit game at the end of the big hit game (high hit probability of high hit, presence of electric support) The effect display (effect D) for notifying (suggesting) is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the timing at which the effect B and the effect C are switched is made different (delayed) from the timing at which the upper attacker 650b is closed (the timing at which the fourth round ends). By comprising in this way, it can prevent that the various processes performed with the pachinko machine 10 concentrate.

  Furthermore, the timing at which the effect B and the effect C are switched is between the timing at which the upper attacker 650b closes (timing at which the fourth round ends) and the timing at which the lower attacker 65f1 opens (timing to start the fifth round) Since the interval period (specific interval period t4) of the game is set on the basis of the timing when the effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is switched by the player, the game ball at this time is a probability change switch 65e3 There is an effect that it is difficult to determine whether or not it is a passable jackpot, and it is possible to suppress boredom in the game due to early grasp of the result of the jackpot game.

  In addition, a plurality of timings at which the effect display is switched are prepared within the specific interval period t4, and by providing means for randomly setting the timing at which the effect display is switched, the jackpot game is generated based on the switch timing of the effect display further It can make it difficult to understand the results.

  Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 68 to FIG. In addition, about the location same as the content of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 demonstrated in 1st Embodiment mentioned above, although description to the display screen or the description is abbreviate | omitted, it is the same also in this embodiment. It has a display.

  First, in the present embodiment, a stage in which the main character is walking outdoors is displayed on the display screen during the normal gaming state ST1 (not shown). When the player wins the jackpot and shifts to the probability variation gaming state ST3, the display screen illustrated in FIG. 68A is displayed. FIG. 68A is a view exemplifying a display screen showing effects in the probability variation gaming state ST3.

  In the display screen of FIG. 68 (a), the variation of the first special symbol is displayed at the upper left of the screen, and the variation of the second special symbol is displayed at the upper right of the screen. On the lower side of the screen, a game state display area is provided in which a "tower search mode (probability change game state ST3)", which is the current game mode (game state), and "right-handed" for notifying the game method are displayed. Further, on the right side of the screen, a situation display area is provided in which an object imitating a tower currently being searched by the main character is displayed. In this state display area, “1F” which is the lowest floor of the object, “100F” which is the top floor, “rooftop” which is above the top floor, and “30F” which indicates the current floor number are displayed. Has been.

  During the probabilistic gaming state ST3, the display is updated every time the special symbol changes once so that the tower goes up one floor and the special symbol changes 100 times without winning a big hit so that it reaches the rooftop. In other words, the number of floors (“30F” in the figure) displayed with the cursor as “current floor” is the same value as the current number of special symbol fluctuations after the jackpot. By the display of the condition display area, the special symbol is changed 100 times without winning a big hit during the probability variation gaming state ST3, and the main character climbs the tower and finally the rooftop is transitioned to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2. It is comprised so that it may display as an effect which arrives at.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68 (b), the display content when winning a big hit during the probability variation gaming state ST3 will be described. FIG. 68 (b) is a view exemplifying a display screen indicating that the jackpot has been won during the probability variation gaming state ST3. In FIG. 68 (b), the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as “555”, and it is displayed that the result of the lottery is a big hit. In addition, the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at “246” indicating the detachment. In the status display area, "50F" is shown as the current floor number (the number of special symbol variations from the end of the previous big hit).

  In the probability variation gaming state ST3, when winning the jackpot, a display body (elevator) for notifying that the jackpot has been won is displayed on the display screen. During the jackpot game, an effect is obtained by getting into the elevator and looking at the destination of the elevator (not shown). As the destination of the elevator, “outdoor” when the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to the normal gaming state ST1 or the short time gaming state ST1 h, and “tower search mode (tower when the probability changing gaming state ST3 is set to There are three types of “1F)” and “rooftop mode” (see FIG. 69) in the case of being set to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, and the destination is suggested by the effect executed during the jackpot game respectively There is.

  In the present embodiment, since the gaming state set after the big hit is changed depending on whether or not the game ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit game, the big hit game before the big hit game start or the big hit game opening stage The game state set after the end has not been determined.

  Therefore, based on the winning jackpot type (A to H), the gaming state that shifts when the game ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 and the gaming state that shifts when the gaming ball does not pass are determined (for example, the jackpot type is In the case of jackpot E, the gaming state transferred after the end of the jackpot game is a probability change gaming state ST3 or short time gaming state ST1h), the effect common to the determination result is used as a jackpot game early stage effect (for example, effect A in FIG. 67) After that, it may be determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3, and based on the result of the determination, it may be configured to set an effect (for example, effect D in FIG. 67) of the game late stage. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the effect on the display screen without a sense of incongruity with respect to the game result during the jackpot game (the result of whether or not the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3).

  FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen showing effects in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2. In the display screen of FIG. 69, it is displayed that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both changing, and in the game state display area, right-handed display and the current game mode (game state) are displayed. A certain "rooftop mode (latency probability change gaming state ST2)" is displayed. Further, in the situation display area, the display of “rooftop” is highlighted to notify that the main character has reached the roof.

  This "rooftop mode" is a mode in which the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is notified (suggested). In the pachinko machine 10, various values are set such that the gaming state in which the player is most likely to obtain a payout is the latent probability changing gaming state ST2. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 78 (a) to 80. In the latent probability changing game state ST2 in which the actual variation target is the second special symbol, the variation time of the special diagram 2 is set short. The small hitting game time (in the small hitting game time, the opening period and the ending time during which the game ball does not win the specified winning combination) is also set short (shorter than the probability variation gaming state ST3). In other words, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set to the game state having the longest time in which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened in the small hit game per unit time among all the game states. Furthermore, the jackpot probability is set to a high probability.

  In the "rooftop mode" that suggests the latent probability change gaming state ST2, do you win the big hit F during the probability change gaming state ST3 (10% of the whole big hit) or without winning the big hit during the positive change gaming state ST3, It is designed to shift by changing the special symbol 100 times.

  At that time, as the effect display performed in the third symbol display device 81, for example, winning a big hit during the probability variation gaming state ST3 (FIG. 68 (b)), effects (not shown) to board the elevator is started Is the elevator rising to the upper floor during the jackpot game, or is it falling to the lower floor? After performing such an effect and informing (suggesting) which mode the player should enter after the jackpot game is finished, an effect display in which the elevator reaches the roof is executed.

  Also, when transitioning to latent probability variation gaming state ST2 without winning a big hit during probability variation gaming state ST3, the effect shown in FIG. 68 (a) is continuously displayed until the special symbol changes 100 times, The current floor number indicated in the status display area for each change increases by one floor. Then, when the special symbol fluctuates 100 times and shifts to “roof mode”, the cursor shown in the status display area shifts from “100F” to “roof” and shifts to “roof mode”.

  Next, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the “roof mode” will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 (a) is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing an effect in the latent probability changing game state ST2. FIG. 70B is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing an effect in the case of winning a small hit with the second special symbol in the latent probability changing game state ST2.

  In the display screen of FIG. 70 (a), it is displayed that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both changing, and in the gaming state display area, the rightward display and the current game mode (game The "rooftop mode (latency probability changing gaming state ST2)" which is the state) is displayed. Further, in the situation display area, the display of “rooftop” is highlighted to notify that the main character has reached the roof.

  Further, “held G (acquired medium display)” is displayed on the upper side of the display screen as a value corresponding to the game ball acquired by the player. And a plurality of treasure boxes are displayed on the roof of the tower at the center of the display screen. This treasure box is displayed to be opened when the result of the special symbol game is a big hit or a small hit.

  The acquired medium display displayed on the upper side of the display screen is a display corresponding to the game ball acquired in a series of game flows (flow from initial big hit to normal game state ST1) in the pachinko machine 10. Is.

  In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to the total number of media acquired during a series of games is displayed as the acquired medium display, but for example, during a series of games, it corresponds to a medium acquired by a big hit game The value and the value corresponding to the medium acquired in the small hit game may be displayed in a display mode that allows the player to identify. By this configuration, it is possible to easily grasp how the player has acquired the medium in a series of games. When such a display is executed, if the value corresponding to the medium acquired in the small hit game satisfies a predetermined condition (value corresponding to the medium that can be acquired in one big hit game), another display is performed. The display mode may be displayed. With such a configuration, there is an effect that the player can easily grasp that the medium equivalent to the big hit game can be obtained as a result of the multiple hit games.

  In the display screen of FIG. 70 (b), the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at “123” indicating a small hit. And the 1st special symbol which was in the change at the same timing as the stop of the change of the 2nd special symbol is compulsorily displayed by the distraction eye. At the center of the display screen, the selected treasure box is opened, and an effect of displaying a small hit from the middle is displayed.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing an effect when a big win is won with the second special symbol in the latent probability changing game state ST2. When the jackpot is won with the second special symbol, one of the treasure boxes displayed on the display screen of FIG. 70 (a) is opened during the fluctuation, and the effect that the monster appears is displayed. Then, during the jackpot, a battle with the monster starts and an effect is displayed so that the game state after the jackpot game is notified (suggested) according to the result of the battle (not shown). For example, when the battle is won, it reaches the roof and shifts to the "rooftop mode". In addition, when it escapes from the battle, it shifts to the “tower search mode (1F)”, and when it loses the battle, an effect is displayed to shift to the “outdoor” stage (not shown).

  As described above, in the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment, an effect that the story progresses in each mode corresponding to the gaming state is displayed, and the story is selected according to the lottery result (big hit, small hit) of the special symbol. The result is configured to change. Since the player can grasp whether or not the current state is advantageous to the player only by looking at the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the gameability (complexity more than the conventional pachinko machine 10 ( There is an effect that a player can play a game without being confused even if a gameability that can acquire many game balls in addition to the jackpot game is adopted.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 81. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed. The other points are the same as in the first control example, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. The difference between the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. The other points are the same as in the first control example, so the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 72 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the present embodiment. The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this embodiment operates the small hitting type selection table 202g and the special electric winning combination (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) with respect to the first embodiment. The difference is that the table 202h and the jackpot scenario 202i are added and that the values of the various counter values referred to in the various tables are changed, and the other configurations are the same as in the first embodiment. Detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The first random number table 202a is different from the first embodiment in that the value set as the jackpot determination value is different. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 73 (a).

  The small hit random number table 202b is different from the first embodiment in that the condition to be judged as a small hit is changed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 73 (b).

  The second random number table 202c is different in that the value set as the winning determination value is different. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 73 (c).

  The jackpot type selection table 202d increases the jackpot type with respect to the first embodiment, and enables selection of jackpots having different specific interval periods during the jackpot, and jackpot type selection used for the short time gaming state ST1h. The difference is that a table D is newly provided. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75.

  The variation pattern selection table 202e and the common pattern variation pattern selection table are different from the first embodiment in that the set variation time is changed. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79.

  The small hitting type selection table 202g is a table used when the small hitting random number table 202b is stabilized as small hitting, and is a table for selecting the small hitting type corresponding to each gaming state. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 (a).

  The special electric combination product operation table 202h is a table in which the operation content of the special combination electric product corresponding to the set jackpot type or small hitting type is stored. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 (b).

  The jackpot scenario 202i is an area for storing a scenario that is selected when a jackpot is made, and stores the timing and the number of times of the action of the accessory during each jackpot. The jackpot scenario 202i is updated by the jackpot control process 2 (S1720 in FIG. 85) and reset by the ending process 2 (S1730 in FIG. 86).

  FIG. 72 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the present embodiment. The RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this embodiment has a small hit type selection table 202g and a special electric winning combination (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) operation table with respect to the first embodiment. The point that 202h is added is different from the point that the values of various counter values referred to in various tables are changed, and the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. Do.

  The jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 is an area to set (store) the jackpot scenario updated by the jackpot control process 2 (S1720 in FIG. 85), and in the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S254 in FIG. 82) A jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set.

  The scenario counter 203c2 is updated by adding 1 when the big hit scenario is set in the big hit scenario setting area 203b2 in the big hit control process 2 (S1720 in FIG. 87), and the ending process 2 (S1730 in FIG. 86) Cleared as soon as you reset the jackpot scenario.

  The other memory area 203z includes the other memory area set in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, and at least the ball entry number counter 203j and the operation counter 203k shown in the first embodiment described above. The notification counter 203m, the remaining ball timer flag 203n, and the remaining ball timer 203o are included, and are used in the same control as the first embodiment described above.

  Next, the contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (a). FIG. 73A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. The first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 199, and in the low probability gaming state, the first probability is high when the value of the random number counter C1 is “7”. In the gaming state, if the value of the first random number counter C1 is "7 to 9", it is determined that the first hit (big hit). That is, the probability of becoming a big hit in the low probability gaming state is "1/200", and the probability of becoming a big hit in the high probability gaming state is "3/200". It is to be noted that both the first lottery game with the first special symbol and the second lottery game with the second special symbol used in the present embodiment are subjected to the first collision determination using the first random number table 202a.

  The contents of the small hitting random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (b). FIG. 73 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the small hitting random number table 202b. In the present embodiment, there is no chance to win a small hit by the first lottery game of the first special symbol (special figure 1). On the other hand, in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2), in the low probability gaming state (low probability: no power support, low probability: power support), the value of the first random number counter C1 is "10 If it is ˜20 ”, it is determined that it is a small hit, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is“ 10 to 199 ”in the high probability gaming state (high probability: no electric support, high probability: electric support). If there is a small hit, it is determined. That is, the small hitting probability by the first lottery game is "0/200", and the small hitting probability by the second lottery game in the low probability gaming state is "11/200", and the second lottery game in the high probability gaming state The probability of small hit according to is 190/200.

  As a result, in the high probability gaming state in which the second lottery game is performed (the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 and the probability variation gaming state ST3), the small hitting game is frequently given. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 (b), in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 and the probability variation gaming state ST3, the time when the second specified winning opening 650 is opened as the small hitting game is the same, The opening time and the ending time set as the small hit game are different, and the opening time and the ending time are set shorter in the small hit game in the latent probability changing game state ST2. That is, the opening time of the second specified winning opening 650 per unit time is longer in the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 than in the probability changing gaming state ST3. Therefore, the number of game balls that the player can acquire as a small hit game can be made more in the latent probability change game state ST2 than in the probability change game state ST3, and the player can also obtain the game ball other than the jackpot game There is an effect that it is possible to provide an unexpected game machine and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the probability of winning in a small winning in the first lottery game is set to 0%, but may be set to, for example, about 10%. Also, the second lottery in the low probability gaming state Although the probability of winning in a small hit in the game is set to "11/200", for example, it may be set to the same probability as the second lottery game in the high probability gaming state.

  The contents of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (c). FIG. 73 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In the present embodiment, the second per-random number counter C4 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the low-probability gaming state, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is “0 to 98”. In the high probability gaming state, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is "0 to 99", it is determined that the second hit (per common figure). That is, the probability of winning in the low probability gaming state is “99/100”, and the probability of winning in the high probability gaming state is “100/100”. In addition, when the winning is won per the usual figure, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is operated, and the game ball enters the second start port 640 easily (special state). In the present embodiment, although the slight probability difference between the high probability and the low probability is provided for the second hit, the same probability may be used.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 75, the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described. FIG. 74 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the jackpot type selection table A 202d referred to in the normal gaming state ST1, and FIG. 74 (b) is a jackpot type referred to in the probability variation gaming state ST3. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically selection table B202d. FIG. 75 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the jackpot type selection table C202d to be referred to in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, and FIG. 75 (b) is a jackpot referred to in the time reduction gaming state ST1h. This is a type selection table D202d.

  The jackpot type selection table 202d is referred to when the jackpot is won as a lottery result of each special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol), and the type of the special symbol elected for the jackpot (the first (1) Based on the special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the gaming state at the time of the big hit, using the counter value obtained from the first hit type counter C2 It is selected from any of A to jackpot H.

  The jackpot type selection table 202d used in the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a jackpot type selection table D202d referred to in the short-time gaming state ST1h is added and the jackpot type to be selected is The difference is that the increased point, the interval time of the big hit game can be set according to the big hit type, and the ratio of the first hit type counter value distributed to each big hit type is changed, and other configurations Are the same. Descriptions of the same parts will be omitted, and differences will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the present embodiment, when the special game 1 is won in the special game state ST1, the ratio in which the game state after the end of the big game is high probability game state (high probability) is Interval time (specific interval time t4 in FIG. 67) and V operation (operation of the switching member 65h) for each jackpot type so that the ratio of low probability state (low probability) becomes 50% at 50%. The presence or absence of the electric support after the end of the jackpot game is set. Specifically, depending on the game state, the game ball as V operation through the probability change switch 65e3 (open ball) open pattern (V possible) to control the operation of the switching member 65h, the game ball change probability switch 65e3 Of the opening pattern (V impossible) which controls the operation of the switching member 65h to be impossible (hard) to pass (enter the ball).

  Furthermore, if the V action is V possible according to the gaming state as the interval time, the game ball is placed in the first variable winning device 65 in the period during which the game ball can pass (enter) the probability change switch 65e3. The game ball can be passed (entered) to the probability change switch 65e3 even if "4 seconds (V acceptable)", which can be won in the specific winning hole 65a, and the V operation is V allowed, In the first specific winning combination opening 65 of the 1 variable winning combination device 65, any one of “one second (V not possible)” in which a winning is impossible (hard) is set.

  Then, it is set whether or not power support (100 times) is given after the end of the jackpot game. Note that the electric support is given regardless of whether the game ball passes (enters) or does not pass (enters) the probability change switch 65e3. When the jackpot type for which "presence" is set is selected, when the game ball passes (enters) the probability change switch 65e3, it shifts to the probability change gaming state (ST3) after the end of the jackpot game and provisionally the game ball turns the probability change switch 65e3 If it does not pass (enter), it will shift to the time saving game state (ST1 h) after the end of the jackpot game.

  In this manner, the current jackpot type is selected from the jackpot types set with different contents according to the first hit type counter value acquired from the first hit type counter C2. For example, when winning a jackpot in the special figure 1 during the normal gaming state ST1 and acquiring 50 as the first hit type counter value, the jackpot type E is selected. During the jackpot game provided by the jackpot type E, the game ball passes (enters) the probability change switch 65e3 to provide the probability change gaming state ST3 after the end of the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, jackpot B, jackpot D, and jackpot H are set as jackpot types for which the normal gaming state ST is selected after the jackpot game ends. Even if "1 second" or "4 seconds" is selected as the interval time, and "V available" or "V not available" is selected as the V operation, transition to the normal gaming state ST1 is possible after the end of the jackpot game It shows that there is sex. By configuring in this way, it becomes impossible to grasp the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game (it becomes difficult) only by grasping the contents of the interval time and the V operation. Therefore, the player is to pay attention to the notification (suggested) of the gaming state after the end of the big hit game performed during the big hit game (or the first special symbol change after the end of the big hit game), and the pachinko machine 10 There is an effect that it is possible to give interest to the effect display to be performed and to prevent a situation in which the game gets bored early.

  In addition, the distribution in which the V action is “V OK” or “V NO” only differs depending on the type of the special symbol, and is set so as not to be changed according to the gaming state. Specifically, in the first special symbol, the rate at which the V action becomes “V acceptable” is set to 90% and the rate at which “V impossible” is set to 10%. In the second special symbol, the V action is set to “V acceptable”. The rate at which the rate of “V” is 100% and the rate at which the rate of “V is not available” is set to 0%. With this configuration, it is not necessary to change the V action (the action of the switching member 65h) depending on the gaming state, so that the capacity for storing the action instruction content for the first variable winning device 65 (the switching member 65h) is reduced. Can (can be of two types). There is an effect.

  Next, selection of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won with the second special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (a). In the normal game state ST1, although the game aiming at the first special symbol (left-handed game) is an appropriate game method advantageous to the player, the normal game state is performed when an inappropriate game (illegal game) is performed. A game using the second special symbol is performed during ST1. As an inappropriate game, by resetting the RAM of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 so as to shorten the fluctuation of the second special symbol in which the long fluctuation (10 minutes) is set during the normal gaming state ST1 By receiving the lottery several times in a shorter time than the fluctuation time normally required, the game is shifted to the most advantageous latent probability change gaming state ST2 for the player without intervention of the proper game flow (see FIG. 66). Action can be considered. Assuming the case where such a game is performed, when the big hit is won with the second special symbol during the normal gaming state ST1, the big hit H is selected. The jackpot H is a jackpot type to shift to the normal gaming state ST1 after the end of the jackpot game.

  Therefore, it is possible to give a penalty to a player who performs an inappropriate game during the normal game state ST1. In addition, about the penalty (penalty) to perform to an inappropriate player, you may use except the above-mentioned contents, for example, during a normal gaming state ST1, it is won by a small hit with a second special symbol that is not a subject of substantial fluctuation. In this case, the variation pattern of the special symbol after the end of the small hit game may be set to a special variation pattern so that at least the variation pattern in which the first special symbol is long variation is forcibly selected. With such a configuration, it is difficult to continue the game substantially, and it is possible to suppress the inappropriate game from being continuously executed.

  In addition, as a result of the improper game, if you win the jackpot, the operation content of the special electric role during the jackpot game, special operation content (the game ball can not enter the specific winning opening (hard) operation Content) may be stored in advance in the ROM of the main controller 110.

  Note that, for example, when the jackpot is won in the state where the second special symbol is held, and the game shifts to the normal game state ST1 after the jackpot game ends, the above-described inappropriate game is performed without the player's intention. Because it may be broken, it may be executed only after a predetermined number of times (upper limit reserve memory number of the second special symbol (4 pieces)) after the end of the big hit game, or during the normal gaming state ST1, the second starting opening 640 You may only run it if you win a prize. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate (suppress) giving the player who is playing a normal game a penalty (penalty) for an inappropriate game, and give the player a sense of dissatisfaction. There is an effect that can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74 (b), the jackpot type selection table B 202d referred to in the probability variation gaming state ST3 will be described. As shown in FIG. 74 (b), in this embodiment, when winning a big hit in the special figure 1 in the probability variation gaming state ST3, a ratio that the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming becomes the high probability gaming state (high probability) At 10%, the percentage of low probability state (low probability) is set to be 90%. This is because the game of the special view 1 in the probability variation gaming state ST3 is an inappropriate game as in the special view 2 game in the normal gaming state ST1, and therefore a penalty is given to the player. On the other hand, if the big win is won in the special figure 2, the percentage of the gaming state after the jackpot game is high probability gaming state (high probability) is 70%, the percentage of low probability state (low probability) is 30%. It is set to become.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75 (a), the jackpot type selection table C202d referred to in the latent probability change gaming state ST2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 75 (a), in this embodiment, when the big win is won in the special figure 1 in the latent probability changing gaming state ST2, the ratio that the gaming state after the big winning game ends becomes a high probability gaming state (high probability). Is set to be 30%, and the proportion to be in the low probability state (low probability) is 70%. This is because the game shown in FIG. 1 in the latent probability changing game state ST2 is an inappropriate game like the game shown in FIG. 2 in the normal game state ST1, so that a penalty is imposed on the player. On the other hand, if the big win is won in the special figure 2, the percentage of the gaming state after the jackpot game is the high probability gaming state (high probability) is 90%, and the percentage of the low probability state (low probability) is 10%. It is set to become.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75 (b), the jackpot type selection table D202d to be referred to in the short time game state ST1h will be described. As shown in FIG. 75 (b), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the short-time gaming state ST1h, the ratio that the gaming state after the jackpot game ends becomes a high probability gaming state (high probability) is as follows. At 95%, the percentage of low probability state (low probability) is set to 5%. On the other hand, if the big win is won in Special Figure 2, the percentage of the gaming state after the big jackpot game is high probability gaming state (high probability) is 5%, the percentage of low probability state (low probability) is 95% It is set to become. This is because the game of the special view 2 in the time saving game state ST1h is an inappropriate game as in the special view 2 game in the normal game state ST1, and therefore, a penalty is given to the player.

  As described above, when winning a big hit in the special view 1 during the short time game state ST1h, even if it is the same low probability state, the game state after the big hit game end is high probability with higher probability than the normal game state ST1. It is set to shift to the gaming state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a player with a chance (retraction chance) to shift to a high probability gaming state for a predetermined period, even if the player transitions to a low probability state (fall). There is an effect that the motivation of the game can be enhanced for the person.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since it is possible to set the transition ratio to the high probability gaming state according to the gaming state and the type of the special symbol, it is possible to have a wider variety of gaming characteristics than conventional pachinko machines. It becomes possible to provide, and the effect that the situation where a player gets tired early can be suppressed. It is also possible to give an appropriate penalty to a player who has played an inappropriate game.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78, a variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation pattern in each gaming state will be described. The present embodiment is the same as the first embodiment except that the fluctuation time set in each fluctuation pattern is different. Description of the same parts will be omitted, and only differences will be described.

  FIG. 76 is a schematic view showing a variation pattern selection table A referred to in the normal gaming state ST1. The normal gaming state ST1 is different from the first embodiment described above in that the variation time of the special view 2 is set to 600000 ms (10 minutes). In the present embodiment, as described above, since a penalty can be given to an inappropriate game, the fluctuation time is set short.

  FIG. 77 is a schematic view showing a variation pattern selection table B referred to in the time saving game state ST1 h. In the short time gaming state ST1h, as in the normal gaming state ST1, the variation time of the special figure 2 is set to 600000 ms (10 minutes) and the variation time of various deviation variation patterns of the special figure 1 is shortened. This is different from the first embodiment.

  FIG. 78 (a) is a schematic view showing a variation pattern selection table C referred to in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2. In the latent probability change gaming state ST2, unlike in the first embodiment, since the special figure 2 is targeted for substantial fluctuation, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is changed to 600000 ms (10 minutes), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is 500 ms. This is different from the above-described first embodiment in that it is changed.

  FIG. 78 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern selection table D referred to in the probability variation gaming state ST3. The probability variation gaming state ST3 is different from the first embodiment described above in that the variation time when the special figure 1 is off is set to 600000 ms (10 minutes).

  FIG. 79 is a schematic view showing a common drawing fluctuation pattern selection table for selecting a fluctuation time of a normal symbol. The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the number of normal symbols is one, and therefore the difference is that the number of normal symbols referring to this table is one.

  FIG. 80 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the small hitting type selection table 202g. FIG. 80 (a) is a small hit type selection table 202g used when the special symbol game is determined to be a small hit, so that a predetermined small hit according to the gaming state is selected. Is set. When the game state is won in the small game state during normal gaming state ST1 or time short game state ST1h, the small hit 1 is selected, and when the small hit is won during the probability change gaming state ST3, the small hit 2 is selected, the latent probability change When a small hit is won during the gaming state ST2, a small hit 3 is selected. The small hit 1, the small hit 2 and the small hit 3 are different in the operation content of the special electric combination during the small hit game. Detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80 (b), the operation content of the special electric winning combination (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) activated during the big hit game or the small hit game will be described. FIG. 80 (b) is a view schematically showing the special motor-operated product operating table 202h. The operation content of the special motorized symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is set by the special motorized symbol operating table 202h.

  First, the operation content of the special electric accessory based on each jackpot type will be described. The same operation is set from jackpot type jackpot A to jackpot E, the opening time is 5 seconds, the number of rounds is 7, and the second variable winning device from 1 round (R) to 4 rounds as the opening action during the round 650 (upper) is open for 29 seconds, and the first variable winning apparatus 65 (lower) is open for 29 seconds for 5 rounds. Then, from the sixth round to the seventh round, the second variable winning device 650 (upper) is set to be opened again for 29 seconds. Although the opening operation time in the round is set to 29 seconds, the specific winning opening is set to be closed when the game ball is 10 winnings in the specific winning opening of each variable winning device during that time. Then, 2 seconds is set as the inter-round interval, 1 second is set as the inter-round specific interval (t4 in FIG. 67), and 5 seconds is set as the ending time.

  The jackpot types E to H are different from the above-mentioned jackpots A to E in that the time interval between rounds is increased from 1 second to 4 seconds, and the same value is set for the other items. . In this manner, it is possible to set whether or not the gaming ball can pass to the probability change switch 65e3 (easiness or difficulty) as described in FIG. 67 by making the specific intervals between rounds different. There is. In this manner, during a specific round (a round for winning the gaming ball to the second specified winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 and a round for winning the gaming ball to the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65) Of the jackpot game, which can substantially pass through the probability change switch 65e3 simply by changing the interval time), providing various playability to the player, It has the effect of being able to improve the interest.

  In this embodiment, the specific interval period t4 is changed to change whether or not the game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V effective period t6 (see FIG. 67). However, other configurations may be adopted. For example, the ball guidance path passage time, which is the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball guidance path 72, may be switched. Alternatively, the value of the V effective period t6 may be changed by changing the value of the V open period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device is opened in the fifth round of the big hit game, for example, the first variable winning device 65 of the first round in the first round In the case of a big hit game in which the specific winning opening 65a is in the open state, the period to be changed according to the game state may be the opening period t1. By configuring in this way, for example, by setting the time obtained by adding the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 longer than the ball guiding path passing time, the jackpot game starts (the opening period t1 starts) and the right The hit game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V effective period t6 and can pass through the probability changing switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the sum of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball guidance path passing time, the game ball that is hit right by the start of the big hit game is the first within the V effective period t6. It is impossible (difficult) to win the first specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65.

  In the present embodiment, the operation content of the special electric accessory set by the special electric accessory operation table 202h and the operation content of the switching member 65h corresponding to each jackpot type are set as a jackpot scenario. Other configurations may be adopted. For example, it may be configured to be able to set including the operation content of the switching member 65h by the special motorized service product operation table 202h.

  In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 having the probability change switch 65e3 is opened only once in the fifth round in one jackpot game. However, in the one jackpot game, The variable winning device 65 may be configured to be opened a plurality of times. Specifically, for example, the first variable winning device 65 may be opened in the third, fifth, and seventh rounds.

  By configuring in this manner, the round before the round in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened can be made the round in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and during one jackpot game It is possible to have a plurality of (three) specific interval periods. Therefore, for each specific interval period, it becomes possible to set whether or not the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 can be reached at the timing when the gaming ball can pass the probability change switch 65e3. Has the effect of being able to hold expectations for the player multiple times during one jackpot game.

  When the above-described configuration is adopted, temporarily, if the V operation is V-permitted (FIG. 74), that is, the switching member 65h is turned on for 2 seconds at the same time as the first specified winning opening 65a is opened. If it is determined that the game ball is fired at a timing that can pass the probability change switch 65e3, and if the game ball is not fired at a timing that can pass the probability change switch 65e3, the player can play the appropriate game method It is good to inform.

  Specifically, a detecting means for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided on the downstream side of the ball guiding path 72, and it is determined that the passage of the game ball is detected within the specific interval period, and the third result is determined based on the determination result. As a display for informing the game method on the symbol display device 81, it is preferable to display contents explaining the game method, such as “Do not stop right-handed!” Or “Probably a chance to change if you keep firing!”. By performing such display, the game can be supported so that the player can play an appropriate game when the first variable prize-winning device 65 is next opened (5th and 7th rounds). It is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the playability.

  The method for determining whether or not an appropriate game is being played during the jackpot game is not limited to the above-described content, and other methods may be used. For example, using a method of determining that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the gaming ball has been operated during the big hit game, or a method of detecting the amount of rotation of the steering wheel and determining that the right hitting game is not performed May be

  Furthermore, the display content of the display for notifying (guiding) the gaming method may be changed based on the content of the jackpot that has won. For example, if an appropriate game is played, the display may be emphasized when the game ball is a big hit that passes the probability change switch 65e3.

  Also, a jackpot scenario may be set in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened in successive rounds. By using such a configuration, even when the interval time is short, the gaming ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3, so that the variation can be further increased and the interest of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

  Next, the operation contents of the special electric accessory based on the small hit type will be described. There are 1 to 3 small hits in the small hit type, and the small hit 1 is a small hit selected when the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 or the short time gaming state ST1h, and the small hitting 2 is a probability variation of the gaming state This is a small hit selected in the case of the gaming state ST3. The small hit 3 is a small hit that is selected when the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 (see FIG. 80 (a)).

  Each small hit is set to be different from the opening time, the opening operation during the round, and the ending time. Specifically, the small hit 1 is set so that the opening time and the ending time are 7.5 seconds, and the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is set to be repeated 6 times as the opening operation during the round. That is, the small hit 1 is set as a small hit where the high speed release is repeated, and the game ball hardly wins (difficult) in the specific winning opening during the small hit game.

  Next, for small end 2, the opening time and ending time are set to 7.5 seconds, the same as for small end 1, but the opening operation during the round is performed once for 1.8 seconds. Is set. That is, in the small hit 2, the game ball is set to be able to win the special winning combination in the operation of the special electric combination.

  Specifically, in the probability variation gaming state ST3 (see FIG. 80 (a)) in which the small hit 2 is selected, the variation time of the special figure 2 is set to 0.5 seconds, and the small hit 2 low hit game The time is set to 16.8 seconds (about 17 seconds) by adding the opening time (7.5 seconds), the opening time (1.8 seconds) and the ending time (7.5 seconds). If the number of game balls to be won in the specific winning combination during the small hit game is two, and if the number of winning balls in the specific winning opening is ten, about 60 to 70 winning balls can be obtained in one minute. It becomes.

  Finally, for the small hit 3, the opening operation in the round is the same as the small hit 2, but the opening time and the ending time are set to 0.3 seconds. In other words, for the small hit 2, the period in which the specific winning opening is closed is set to be 10 times or more shorter.

  Specifically, in the latent probability changing game state ST2 (see FIG. 80 (a)) in which the small hit 3 is selected, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 0.5 seconds, and the small hit 3 of the small hit The game time is set to 2.4 seconds (approximately 2.5 seconds) by adding the opening time (0.3 seconds), the opening time (1.8 seconds) and the ending time (0.3 seconds). If the number of game balls to be awarded to the specific prize opening during the small hit game is 2, and the number of prize balls in the specific prize opening is 10, it is possible to obtain about 480 prize balls per minute. .

  That is, in small hit 3, the operation of the special electric combination is set so that the gaming ball can win the specified winning combination, and it is the time when the specific winning opening is not opened in the small hitting game. By shortening the opening time and the ending time, the open state of the specific winning opening by the small hit game can appear more frequently than the small hit two. Therefore, it is possible for the player to acquire a large number of game balls, and there is an effect that the interest of the game is improved. Also, by adding another game characteristic (a game characteristic of waiting for the game state to shift to the latent probability change game state ST2) to the game characteristic of waiting for the big hit game to be executed as in the conventional case, There is an effect that it is possible to provide a wide variety of effects and to prevent the player from getting bored early.

  Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. FIG. 81 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted. Further, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that an advantageous period flag 223 m and an advantageous information storage area 223 n are added. Since this is the same as that of the first embodiment, its detailed description is omitted.

  The advantageous period flag 223m is a flag that is set to ON while the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability gaming state, and is set to ON when the gaming state is in the high probability gaming state. It is set to OFF when a low probability gaming state is entered.

  The advantageous information storage area 223 n is an area for storing gaming information while the advantageous period flag 223 m is set to on (during an advantageous state). As gaming information, the number of gaming balls acquired during the advantageous period, and the number of jackpots and small hits which are won during the advantageous period are stored. The information stored in the advantageous information storage area 223n is cleared when the advantageous period flag 223m is set to OFF.

  By temporarily storing the number of game balls obtained by the player during the high probability game continuation using the above-mentioned advantageous period flag 223m and the advantageous information storage area 223n, the acquisition medium display on the display screen in the latent probability change gaming state ST2 It becomes possible to display (see FIG. 70).

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in the second embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, illustration and its description are abbreviate | omitted about the process similar to 1st Embodiment, and illustration and its description are demonstrated only about a different control process.

  The first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S254) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S254). The first special symbol variation stop process 2 (FIG. 82, S254) is different from the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 29, S204) in the first embodiment in that the process of S651 is added. . About other processing, since the same processing as a 1st embodiment is performed, the detailed explanation is omitted.

  After the variation stop of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is executed in the processing of S609, the processing of S651 is executed. In the process of S651, the jackpot scenario 202i (determined by the special motorized product operation table) defined for the operation of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type determined is selected from the ROM 202 and set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 (S651).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257). The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (FIG. 83, S257) is different from the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 36, S207) in the first embodiment in that the process of S1051 is added. . About other processing, since the same processing as a 1st embodiment is performed, the detailed explanation is omitted.

  After the variation stop of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is executed in the processing of S1009, the processing of S1051 is executed. In the process of S1051, the jackpot scenario 202i defined for the operation of the jackpot game corresponding to the determined jackpot type is selected from the ROM 202 and set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 (S651).

  Here, in the jackpot scenario, operation for each hour in the jackpot game is set. When the start of the jackpot game is set, after the opening period set in the jackpot scenario elapses, the specific winning opening set in the jackpot scenario is opened and set. After that, when the closing condition (for example, until 10 ball winning or 30 seconds opening time elapses) is established, the specific winning opening is closed, and thereafter, after the interval period set in the jackpot scenario has elapsed, the next The jackpot round is started and the opening of the special winning opening is set.

  In the second embodiment, jackpot scenarios are stored in the ROM 202 corresponding to the gaming state and jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and the corresponding jackpot scenario is selected. Here, even if it is a jackpot type that is set in an opening pattern that allows a game ball to enter the probability variation switch 65e3, the opening period and the interval period are set to be variable, so that the game ball is present in the probability variation switch 65e3. It can be set to a jackpot that can enter the ball and a jackpot that can not enter the ball. As a result, depending on the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to variably set the probability variation ratio for each gaming state by restricting the jackpot type that can enter the probability variation switch 65e3 by the opening time or the interval time.

  In the normal gaming state ST1 in which playing a game by letting the gaming ball flow down to the left flow path PA1 and letting the game ball enter the first start opening 630 is set as the normal gaming method, the right flow path PA2 When the game is performed by letting the game ball flow down, the second ordinary motorized role product 640a is easy to open, so when playing the game ball by letting the game ball flow down the left channel PA1, the first starting opening 630 It is possible to enter the game ball into the second starting port 640 more easily than the game ball enters. For the player, even in the normal gaming state, it is advantageous to play the game by letting the game ball flow down to the right channel PA2, because more lottery opportunities for the second special symbol can be obtained. However, in the second embodiment, even if it is a jackpot type opened in the opening pattern that can enter the probability change switch 65e3 when it becomes a jackpot in the normal gaming state in the second special symbol, it is set in the jackpot scenario Since the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a is finished before the gaming ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 by the interval period, the probability changing switch 65e3 may be made to pass the gaming ball The probability change is not given to the player, that is, the probability change ratio of the second special symbol is set to 0%. Therefore, even if an illegal act is performed in which the game ball is caused to flow down to the right channel PA2 in the normal game state ST1, a disadvantage on the game store side can be suppressed.

  Similarly, in each gaming state, even if the flow paths (left flow path PA1 and right flow path PA2) in which a game is played are set in design, the probability change ratio in the winning opening entering in different flow paths is disadvantageous to the player It can be set by the jackpot scenario so that

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the normal symbol fluctuation process 2 (S156) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation process 2 (S156). This normal symbol variation process 2 (S156) is different from the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 41, S106) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S1214 to S1215 are deleted. About other processing, since the same processing as a 1st embodiment is performed, the detailed explanation is omitted. In the present embodiment, the processing of S1214 to S1215 in the first embodiment is deleted, and in the present embodiment, one second is twice as the open time and the number of times of the second ordinary electric power winning object 640a regardless of the gaming state. An opening pattern is set. Accordingly, the support opening pattern is always easy to win the second starting port 640, and the second starting port 640 can be set to easily win when it is opened.

  In this way, the gaming ball is moved to the second starting opening 640 if it is a gaming state (time reduction gaming state ST1 h, latent probability change gaming state ST2, probability change gaming state ST3) in which the game ball is made to flow down the right flow path PA2 You can win a lot. In the present embodiment, when the game ball flows down to the right flow path PA2, it is more difficult to win a prize at the first start port 630 than when the game ball flows down to the left flow path PA1. Therefore, it is possible to perform a game by changing the second special symbol with priority, and a jackpot can be easily set to be given to the player by the second special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85, a jackpot control process 2 (S1720) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 2 (S1720). The jackpot control process 2 (S1720) is different from the jackpot control process (FIG. 46, S1604) in the first embodiment in that the processes from S1621 to S1623 are changed to the processes of S1721 to S1724. For the other processes, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

  In the process of S1721, it is determined whether the jackpot scenario is set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 (S1721). When it is determined that the big hit scenario is set (S1721: Yes), the scenario counter d2 is incremented by 1 and updated (S1722). Thereafter, the process of S1723 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1721 that the jackpot scenario is not set (S1721: No), this process ends. In the jackpot scenario, data corresponding to the scenario counter is set, and operation data corresponding to the current scenario counter is read and controlled.

  In the process of S1723, it is determined whether the data corresponding to the current scenario counter is data indicating the start of opening (S1723). If the data indicates the start of opening (S1723: Yes), an opening command is set (S1724). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1723 that the opening is not the start (S1723: No), the process of S1624 is executed.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, since the start of the opening and the start timing of the new round can be determined by the jackpot scenario, the opening time and the interval time can be easily changed for each jackpot type. Can be controlled.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the ending process 2 (S1730) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process 2 (S1730). The ending process 2 (FIG. 86, S1730) is different from the ending process (FIG. 48, S1630) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S1656 to S1657 are changed to the processes of S1731 to S1733. In the second embodiment, even if the jackpot is given a probability variation gaming state, since the jackpot type is set in which the upper limit of the number of times the symbol becomes a time saving state is set, the process of S1731 (time saving counter 203t The timing of the process of setting 100 to 100 is changed and set. Furthermore, in the final process of the ending process 2 (S1730) of setting the process of the end of the jackpot, the jackpot scenario set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 is cleared to 0 and reset. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot game is in progress by the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and gaming state (normal gaming state ST1, short-time gaming state ST1h, latent probability changing gaming state) Since it is possible to set a plurality of ratios to shift to the high probability gaming state after the big hit game based on the ST2 and the probability variation gaming state ST3), the second lottery game is not performed in the normal gaming state ST1 It is possible to extremely reduce the rate of transition to the high probability gaming state (0% in this embodiment). By configuring in this manner, even if an improper game (illegal game) is performed, the game does not shift to a state advantageous to the player (high probability gaming state), so an illegal game targeting the pachinko machine 10 is There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In the second embodiment, the jackpot type selection table 202d is used to select the jackpot type based on the special symbol type and the gaming state. For example, the jackpot type selection based on the special symbol type is selected. And selection of the interval time based on the gaming state may be performed using another table. Specifically, in the jackpot type selection table 202d, the jackpot type is selected based on the type of the special symbol, and another table (for example, an interval time type selection table) is used to select an interval time corresponding to the gaming state. Choose And you may make it perform jackpot control using the selected jackpot classification and interval time. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the type of the big hit type, and it is possible to reduce the capacity of the main control device 110.

  Further, in the above-described interval time type selection table, the gaming state is associated with the interval time (in the case of a specific gaming state, a specific interval time is always selected), but a predetermined counter (for example, an interval) A plurality of interval times may be selected based on the counter value of the time type counter). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the gameplay more complicated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Moreover, although this 2nd Embodiment demonstrated using the pachinko machine (simultaneous variation type) in which the fluctuation | variation of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol is performed simultaneously, it is employ | adopted for the game machine of other types. May be As other types of game machines, for example, a game machine of a type that executes a change in the order in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol win in the starting opening, or a change of one special symbol causes the other special symbol There is a type of gaming machine that is executed in preference to the fluctuation of the above.

  Further, when the game ball wins at the first start opening, a winning lottery is performed, and when the lottery result is the first result, the first winning opening is operated in a state where the winning can be made. When the first bonus game and the lottery result are the second result, the second bonus game that activates the second prize opening in a state where the prize can be won, and the second bonus game during the second bonus game, Used in a gaming machine (1 type 2 type mixed machine) provided with a third award game that activates the first prize opening in a state where a prize can be won by passing a game ball through a specific area provided in the prize opening. May be

  The second embodiment is configured such that the game ball passes through the ball guiding path 72 only when the second variable winning device 650 is in the closed state, but the second variable winning device 650 is in the open state. Alternatively, a game ball that has passed a specific route may pass through the ball guiding route 72. By configuring in this way, the ball flow of the game balls on the game board 13 can be complicated, and there is an effect that the player can be entertained.

  In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a game ball that has passed through a specific route other than the ball guiding route 72 wins the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65. By configuring in this way, the ball flow of the game balls on the game board 13 can be complicated, and there is an effect that the player can be entertained.

  According to the second embodiment, two specific winning holes are provided in the flow path of the game ball, and the game ball that has passed through the upper (upstream) specific winning hole in the closed state is specified on the lower side (downstream side). A game that is configured so as to be able to reach the winning opening, and further provided with a delay guiding path that delays the flow time of the game ball between the upper (upstream) specific winning opening and the lower (downstream) specific winning opening. The timing at which the game ball reaches the specific winning opening on the downstream side is changed by changing the length of the specific interval period t4 (see FIG. 67) in accordance with the gaming state (normal, definite change, latency, short time) Configure as possible.

  By configuring in this way, it is changed whether or not the gaming ball that has won the specific winning combination on the downstream side passes through the specific area (probability change switch 65 e 3) provided in the specific winning combination. It is configured to be able to change the mode of the game state to be transferred (set) after the end of the big hit game. It is possible to provide a substantially V-passable jackpot game and a V-impossible (hard) jackpot game without changing the operation control of the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the main control device 110 in the big hit game can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as described in the first embodiment described above, the operation control of the first variable winning device 65 (switching member 65h) according to the type of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) (Operation control that allows the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 and operation control that can not pass (hard)) is set, and the length of the specific interval period t4 is set according to the gaming state when winning a big hit Thus, it is possible to substantially set a plurality of jackpot game ratios that can pass the probability change switch 65e3, to provide the player with various game characteristics, and to improve the interest of the game. Has the effect of

  In the present embodiment, the specific interval period t4 is changed to change whether or not the game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V effective period. The configuration may be adopted. For example, the ball guidance path passage time, which is the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball guidance path 72, may be switched. Alternatively, the value of the V effective period t6 may be changed by changing the value of the V open period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device is opened in the fifth round of the big hit game, for example, the first variable winning device 65 of the first round in the first round In the case of a big hit game in which the specific winning opening 65a is in the open state, the period to be changed according to the game state may be the opening period t1. By configuring in this way, for example, by setting the time obtained by adding the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 longer than the ball guiding path passing time, the jackpot game starts (the opening period t1 starts) and the right The hit game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V effective period t6 and can pass through the probability changing switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the sum of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball guidance path passing time, the game ball that is hit right by the start of the big hit game is the first within the V effective period t6. It is impossible (difficult) to win the first specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65.

  Furthermore, when different time can be set as the specific interval time, the jackpot game is in progress, and the time of the predetermined interval period after the specific interval period is set to offset the difference of the specific interval time, and the big hit game It is preferable that the sum of the interval times in is matched. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to unify the time used for each process performed using an interval period with a small amount of information processing during a big hit game, and to perform a stable process. The effect is

  In this embodiment, the sphere guide path 72 (delay guide path) is provided so that the sphere guide path passage time is a predetermined time (delayed). However, the entrance (opening 70a) and the exit (discharge section 70e) of this path are provided. ) May be provided with a detecting means (sensor) for detecting the passage of the game ball, and a means for determining (monitoring) that the game ball has passed within a predetermined time. By using such a configuration, it is possible to easily find a clogged ball generated in the ball guiding path 72 or an illegal act of intentionally retaining a game ball in the guiding path using a magnet or a threaded ball. It has the effect of becoming possible.

  The first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the ball guiding path 72 (see FIG. 65) used in the second embodiment may be used in the following game machine . That is, it has the first round number (for example, 12 rounds) and the second round number (for example, 15 rounds) as the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and variable winnings provided on the upper side of the game board 13 from the first round to the 12th round The jackpot game is executed when the device (second variable winning device 650) is opened and the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65) provided on the lower side of the gaming board 13 is opened from the 13th round to the 15th round. You may use for a game machine.

  Using the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the ball guiding path 72 used in the second embodiment for such a gaming machine, wasting the launched gaming balls There is no and it is possible to entertain the effect during the jackpot game using a specific interval time between specific rounds (between the 12th and 13th rounds).

  Specifically, at the end of the 12th round, the second variable winning device 650 is closed, and the gaming ball flows down the ball guiding path 72. Since the time required for the game ball to pass the ball guiding path 72 is set to 3 to 4 seconds (see FIG. 65), the gaming ball having passed through the opening 70a of the ball guiding path 72 is the first variable winning device It takes at least 3 seconds to reach 65.

  Using the time required for the game ball to reach the first variable winning device 65 (arrival time), an effect between rounds (an effect that tells whether the current jackpot game is a 12-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot) Even if the right-handed game is continued, there is an effect that it is possible to eliminate (reduce) useless game balls (game balls that do not win the specific winning opening of the variable winning device despite the big hit). is there.

  In other words, if the above-mentioned effect during the jackpot game is executed on a gaming machine having one variable winning device, it passes through the variable winning device during a specific interval time (the specific winning port of the variable winning device is closed). The game ball can not be won in the specific winning opening despite the jackpot game, and becomes a useless game ball. Also, if the specific interval time is shortened in order to reduce useless game balls, an effect that is executed between specific rounds (an effect that says whether the current jackpot game is a 12-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot) The problem that an effect will become weak occurs.

  On the other hand, when the effect during the jackpot game described above is executed by the gaming machine using the configuration of the present embodiment, the ball guiding path 72 where the gaming ball can flow when the second variable winning device 650 is in the closed state. Since effects during a specific interval time are performed using the time (3 to 4 seconds) in which the game ball flows down, it is possible to suppress wasted balls generated during the big hit and also effects (to be executed between the specific rounds (this big hit) There is an effect that it is possible to strengthen the effect of reverberating whether the game is a 12-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot.

  If the interval time between specific rounds is set to be shorter than the time when the gaming ball flows down the ball guiding path 72, the gaming ball that has passed through the second variable winning device 650 will reach the first variable winning device 65. Since the first variable winning device 65 is in the open state, it is possible to eliminate the generation of useless game balls.

  In addition, it is possible to divert the display data displayed in the ending period of 12 rounds jackpot, and to make it display on the specific interval time of 15 rounds jackpots as presentation in this case. By adopting such an effect, it is possible to reduce the amount of display data, and it is possible to make the player think that the 12th round is a big hit, and to the player when the 13th round is started. It has the effect of providing surprise and joy.

  In addition, a detection means for detecting gaming balls flowing down in the ball guiding path 72 is provided, and when the detection means detects gaming balls during a specific interval period, the present jackpot is a 15 round jackpot (the jackpot is still (Continued) may be notified. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress an action of stopping the firing of the gaming ball during the interval period during the jackpot game.

  Furthermore, the configurations of the above-described embodiments may be combined to perform the following. For example, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged in parallel, and the game balls meander in the horizontal direction from the second variable winning device 650 toward the first variable winning device 65. A configuration in which a guidance route for guiding the robot is provided may be used for the following gaming machines. That is, a variable winning device provided with the first round number (for example, 12 rounds) and the second round number (for example, 15 rounds) as the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and provided on the upstream side from the first round to the twelfth round The second variable winning device 650) is opened, and used in a gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65) provided on the downstream side is opened from the 13th round to the 15th round It is also good.

  In this configuration, when the variable winning device provided on the upstream side is closed, the gaming ball rolls on the guiding path and is guided to the downstream variable winning device. This guide route is configured to meander in the horizontal direction so that a predetermined time (a time longer than the interval period, for example, 3 seconds) is required for the game ball to pass. A plurality of opening patterns are set so that the upstream variable winning device and the downstream variable winning device are opened in a predetermined order during one big hit game, and the open pattern according to the type of big hit Is set.

  Then, the open / close status of each variable winning device can be displayed by the display means. That is, the player is configured to be able to grasp the situation where the variable winning device is closed by checking the display means. However, it is displayed so that it can not be determined whether the closing status is an interval period (during a big hit) or an ending period (end of big hit).

  By using such a configuration, for example, the display means indicates that the variable winning device is closed in the interval period when the upstream variable winning device is closed and then the downstream variable winning device is opened. By displaying the effect (closing effect) on the display means, the player plays the game while expecting whether the jackpot game is over or will continue. Then, at the same time as the interval period ends and the downstream variable winning device is opened, an effect (opening effect) indicating that the variable winning device is opened is displayed on the display device. At the timing when the opening effect is displayed on the display means, the game ball rolling on the guide route has not reached the downstream variable winning device (the time required to pass the guide route rather than the interval time) The game ball rolling on the guidance route while the closing effect is being executed (while the upstream variable winning It becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the waste of the game ball while executing the effect indicating the closing of the variable winning device in the jackpot game. In addition, when using such a structure, it is good to prepare multiple types of open patterns of each variable winning apparatus in a big hit game.

  Below, the modification 1 of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG.

<Modified Example 1 of Second Embodiment>
In the first modification, the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d is made different from that in the second embodiment described above, and a game property different from that in the second embodiment described above is provided. Specifically, as will be described later, in this modification, when the big win is won in the normal gaming state ST1 and the game shifts to the probable gaming state ST3, the high is limited to a predetermined period (100 rotations) after the jackpot game ends. It is equipped with the game characteristic (so-called, 2 times loop) which wins a jackpot at least twice while maintaining the probability gaming state.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a flow in which various game states are set in the present modification. The first modification is different from the second embodiment described above in the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d. The other configurations are the same, so the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, since the normal gaming state ST1 is the same as the second embodiment described above, the description thereof is omitted. Next, the jackpot distribution in the probability variation gaming state ST3 will be described.

  In the probability variation gaming state ST3, the real variation target is set in the special figure 2, and if the big win is won in the special figure 2, the high probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state ST3 or latent probability variation gaming state ST2) with a probability of 100% Migrate to It should be noted that the probability change gaming state ST3 is switched to the latent probability change gaming state ST2 by ending the power support when the variation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times without winning a big hit, so the game While staying in the probability variation gaming state ST3 (until the electric support is completed), the player plays the game while paying attention to winning the next jackpot.

  Next, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the allocation is set so that the pullback jackpot for shifting to the probability changing game state ST3 is 34% and the jackpot for shifting (falling) to the short-time gaming state ST1h is 66%.

  Next, in the short-time gaming state ST1h, the allocation is set so that the pullback jackpot for shifting to the probability-changing gaming state ST3 is 75% and the jackpot for shifting (falling) to the normal gaming state ST1 is 25%. At this time, the short game state ST1h is not won, and if the variation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, the electric support is ended and the game state ST1 is shifted to the normal game state ST1. The distribution is set such that the rate of transition to the probability variation gaming state ST3 which is the high probability gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state ST1 which is the same low probability state by winning the jackpot during this time.

  As described above, in the first modification, once transitioning from the low probability state (normal gaming state ST1) to the high probability gaming state (probability changing gaming state ST3), the special symbol fluctuation 100 after a big hit is made within a predetermined period (big hit). Only up to two times), and then two big hits are guaranteed while maintaining a high probability gaming state. Therefore, the player is not satisfied only with the transition from the low probability state to the high probability gaming state, and then, while having the purpose of winning the jackpot within a predetermined period in the special symbol game performed in the high probability gaming state The game can be continued. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Below, the modification 2 of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG.

<Modified Example 2 of Second Embodiment>
In the second modification, an upper limit number (110 times) is provided for the number of games (the number of fluctuations) in the high-probability gaming state, and the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d is different from the second embodiment described above. The game is different from the above-described second embodiment. Specifically, as will be described later, in this modification, when a big win is won in the normal game state ST1 and a transition is made to the probable game state ST3, a specific period (high probability game) after a predetermined period has elapsed after the jackpot game ends. Only in the latent probability changing game state ST2 in which the electric support is completed), and the game property (so-called two-time loop) for winning the jackpot at least twice while maintaining the high probability game state. It is what you have. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a flow in which various game states are set in the present modification. The second modification is different from the above-described second embodiment in the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d. The other configurations are the same, so the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, since the normal gaming state ST1 is the same as the second embodiment described above, the description thereof is omitted. Next, the jackpot distribution in the probability variation gaming state ST3 will be described.

  In the second modification, the high probability gaming state is set to shift (fall) to the low probability state when the special symbol changes 110 times without winning the jackpot. In this probability variation gaming state ST3, when the real variation target is set in the special figure 2, and winning a big hit in the special figure 2, probability variation gaming state ST3 is set again with a probability of 70%, low with a probability of 30% Transition to the probability state. The probability change gaming state ST3 is switched to the latent probability change gaming state ST2 when the power support is ended when the variation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times without winning the jackpot.

  Next, in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, after the big hit, the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol starts from the 101st rotation, and the high probability gaming state transitions to the low probability state (falling) until the 110th rotation Is a gaming state to be executed. If the jackpot is won during the latent probability changing game state ST2, the game state shifts to a high probability gaming state (probability changing gaming state ST3 or latent probability changing gaming state ST2) with a probability of 100%.

  Next, in the short-time gaming state ST1h, the allocation is set so that the pullback jackpot for shifting to the probability-changing gaming state ST3 is 90% and the jackpot for shifting (falling) to the normal gaming state ST1 is 10%. At this time, the short game state ST1h is not won, and if the variation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, the electric support is ended and the game state ST1 is shifted to the normal game state ST1. The distribution is set such that the rate of transition to the probability variation gaming state ST3 which is the high probability gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state ST1 which is the same low probability state by winning the jackpot during this time.

  As described above, in the second modification, the low probability state (normal gaming state ST1) once transits to the high probability gaming state (probability changing gaming state ST3), and thereafter, the number of times of change is a predetermined number (big hit) Only in the specific period (latency probability change gaming state ST2) after the special symbol fluctuation (up to 100 times) has passed, then two jackpots are secured while maintaining the high probability gaming state. Therefore, the player is not satisfied only with the transition from the low probability state to the high probability gaming state, and thereafter, without being won within the predetermined period in the special symbol game performed in the high probability gaming state, after the predetermined period has elapsed. The game can be continued while having the goal of winning a jackpot during a specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Below, the modification 3 of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG.

<Modification 3 of Second Embodiment>
In the third modification, the ball guide path 72 provided in the right region of the front view of the game board 13 of the second embodiment described above is provided with a shortened path 75 as another path, and the flowing game ball is guided to the ball. A distribution mechanism 75 a that distributes the path 72 and the shortened path 75, a path that guides the game balls that have flowed down the shortened path 75 to the first variable prize-winning device 65, and a path that guides the game board 13 to the front view lower side area Is different in that a distribution mechanism 75b is provided. About another structure, it is the same structure as 2nd Embodiment, The detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 89 is an enlarged view in which a right side area of the game board 13 according to the third modification is enlarged. In the present modification, the game balls that have passed through the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state are alternately distributed to the ball guiding path 72 and the shortened path 75 by the distribution mechanism 75a. Here, the distribution mechanism 75a is configured to be able to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise, and is configured such that a rotation range (rotation angle) is restricted by a rotation restricting member. Since the game balls distributed to the ball guiding path 72 flow down the same path as in the second embodiment described above, the description thereof is omitted.

  On the other hand, the shortened path 75 is configured such that the trajectory of the sphere is linear with respect to the ball guiding path 72, and at least the gaming balls distributed to the ball guiding path 72 first reach the discharge unit 70e. In order to quickly discharge from the shortening path 75, the time taken for the game ball to pass the shortening path is set to 2 seconds. As described above, it is possible to intentionally change the flow order of the game balls on the game board 13 by providing the flow paths of the game balls having different shapes and distributing the game balls to any path by the distribution mechanism. (The game board 13 can flow down in a different order from the fired order).

  By using such a configuration, for example, when the gaming ball that has first passed the second variable winning device 650 in the specific interval period is distributed to the shortening path 75, the gaming ball can pass the probability changing switch 65e3 When it becomes possible to win the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 within the period, on the other hand, the gaming ball that has first passed through the second variable winning device 650 is distributed to the ball guiding path 72, the probability change switch It becomes possible (impossible) to cause the game ball to win the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 within a period in which the game ball can pass 65e3.

  Therefore, since it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 depending on which path the game ball flows down, the player is provided with the game characteristic of passing the probability change switch 65e3 by himself. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  Further, in the present modification, a distribution mechanism 75b is provided for distributing the game ball having flowed down the shortening path 75 into a path for guiding the first variable winning device 65 and a path for guiding to the lower area of the gaming board 13 in front view. ing. As a result, it is possible to distribute whether or not the gaming balls having flowed down the shortening path 75 are guided to the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, the flow path of the game ball on the game board 13 can be further complicated, and the player can enjoy the flow of the game ball.

  In addition, as in the present modification, even if the distribution mechanism in which the distribution destinations are determined in a predetermined order is used, a plurality of distributions are performed before the gaming ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 having the probability change switch 65e3. Since the mechanism is distributed to a plurality of flow paths, it is possible to make it difficult to set the state of each distribution mechanism using the launched game balls so as to be a predetermined distribution destination.

  Furthermore, when the first variable winning device 65 is in the closed state, the gaming ball having flowed down the ball guiding path 72 flows down on the first variable winning device 65 and abuts on the distribution mechanism 75b, and the rotation of the distribution mechanism 75b It flows down toward the bottom of the game board while changing the state. Thereby, the rotation state of the distribution mechanism 75b always changes.

  In this modification, only the gaming balls flowing down the shortening path 75 reach the distribution mechanism 75b, but the gaming balls flowing down the ball guiding path 72 may also reach the distribution mechanism 75b. Further, a sorting mechanism 75c (not shown) that sorts only the game balls that have flowed down the ball guiding path 72 may be separately provided. By configuring in this way, the flow-down path of the game ball can be further complicated, and the player can enjoy the flow of the game ball, and for example, the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state passes To which path the game balls are distributed by using in a pachinko machine in which it is determined whether or not to win the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 during a period in which the game balls can pass the probability changing switch 65e3 The possibility of rushing into the probable gaming state can be changed.

  In addition, since a plurality of distribution mechanisms are provided in a path through which the game balls flow down during a right-handed game other than the big hit game, the distribution of each distribution mechanism is performed when a game that allows the game balls to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is performed. It becomes difficult to adjust the position in advance, and the game result can be made random.

In this modification, a sorting mechanism for sorting game balls in two directions is used, but a sorting mechanism for sorting in three or more directions may be used. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the ball flow of the gaming ball more complicated, and it is possible to entertain the player.

  Also, in this modification, a mechanism for physically distributing game balls is used as the distribution mechanism, but other configurations may be used, for example, a lottery is performed based on passing through a predetermined area, and the lottery result A means for determining the distribution direction may be provided.

  In the present modification, the game ball that has passed through the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state reaches the distribution mechanism 75a, but is upstream of the second variable winning device 650 (the game ball is the second game ball). It may be configured to reach the distribution device 75a in the area before reaching the variable winning device 650. In this case, the game balls distributed in the predetermined direction by the distributing device 75a are the second variable winning device. A game ball that has flowed down toward the other side and is distributed in a direction other than a predetermined direction separately passes a specific flow path (for example, the shortened path 75 or the ball guide path 72), and the game ball that has passed the specific flow path is The distribution mechanism 75b may be configured to distribute the game ball path reaching the first variable winning device and the other paths. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to allow the game balls distributed in directions other than the second variable winning device 650 direction by the distribution mechanism 75a to reach the first variable winning device 65 side by the distribution mechanism 75b. .

  With this configuration, game balls that have not won the second variable winning device 650 in the open state may be distributed to the first variable winning device 65 in the open state so as to be able to win. There is an effect that an unexpected game can be provided.

  In addition, the movement of the game ball on the game board by configuring the player not to notify the player of the timing when the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is in the open state during the big hit game. And there is an effect that the game can be enjoyed while watching the open / close state of each variable winning device.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  All or some of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Feature A group> (2-loop configuration)
A player is given an advantageous benefit based on the state setting means capable of setting at least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state, and establishment of a predetermined condition. In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game different from the first bonus game, the state setting means sets the first advantageous state. If the first bonus game is executed while the first bonus game is being executed, the first advantageous state is set even after the first bonus game is executed, and the second bonus game is executed, The second privilege state is set after execution of the second privilege game, and the first privilege game is executed when the second privilege state is set and the first privilege game is executed. The first advantageous state is set after the game is executed. Gaming machine A1, wherein is.

  The state setting means sets at least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the bonus game execution means executes at least a first bonus game for awarding a bonus advantageous to the player and a second bonus game different from the first bonus game. When the first benefit game is executed in a state where the first advantage state is set, the first advantage state is set by the state setting means even after the first benefit game is executed, and the second benefit When the game is executed, the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the second benefit game. In the state where the second advantageous state is set, when the first benefit game is executed, the first advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the first benefit game. Thereby, even after the first bonus game is executed in the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state is set, so that it is possible to continuously set the advantageous state for the player. Therefore, the advantageous state can be continued until a plurality of bonus games are executed, and the player's interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the bonus game execution means is capable of executing a third bonus game different from the first bonus game and the second bonus game, and the state setting means is in the first advantageous state When a specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second advantageous state can be set, and the third privilege game is executed in a state where the second advantageous state is set, The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the specific state is set after the third privilege game is executed.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. The state setting means sets a specific state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. In the state where the second advantageous state is set, when the third bonus game is performed, the specific state is set by the state setting unit after the third bonus game is performed. Thereby, in the second advantageous state, the specific gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player when the third gaming state is executed is set, so that the continuing state of the advantageous state can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the gambling nature of the game becomes too high.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the first advantageous state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous state.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the first advantageous state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous state, so that the advantage given to the player is excessive. The effect is that it can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means, the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game executing means. A gaming machine A4 characterized by having means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means, the privilege game is improved by the privilege game executing means. As a result, the player can be expected to perform a bonus game.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A4, a start condition determining means capable of determining establishment of a first start condition and a second start condition different from the first start condition, and the start condition determination means And lottery means for executing a lottery based on the determination that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, and the bonus game execution means is configured to select a specific lottery by the lottery means. A gaming machine A5, which executes the privilege game based on the determination that the result is established.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by either of the gaming machines A1 or A4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the start condition determining means determines whether the first start condition and the second start condition different from the first start condition are satisfied. A lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the fact that the start condition determining means determines that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that the lottery means determines that a specific lottery result has been established, the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect the establishment of the first start condition and the second start condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, in the case where the advantageous state is not set by the setting means, the gaming machine A5 is characterized by having a regulating means for regulating the establishment of the second start condition.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A3 or A4, the establishment of the second start condition is restricted by the restriction means when the advantageous state is not set by the setting means, so that the player can There is an effect that a disadvantageous state can be easily set.

  In any one of gaming machines A3 to A5, first identification information indicating a lottery result of the lottery means based on establishment of the first start condition, and a lottery result of the lottery means based on establishment of the second start condition Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying each of the two identification information on the display means, and the dynamic display means can dynamically display the first identification information and the second identification information simultaneously. A gaming machine A6 that is configured.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A3 to A5, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the first start condition and the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the second start condition are displayed by the dynamic display means Dynamically displayed on the means. The first identification information and the second identification information are simultaneously displayed dynamically by the dynamic display means. Thereby, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information can be efficiently performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine A5 or A6, comprising: a releasing means for releasing the restriction by the restricting means based on the setting of the specific advantageous state by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5 or A6, the restriction by the restriction means is released by the release means based on the setting of the specific advantageous state by the setting means. There is an effect that a game can be performed in expectation that a specific advantageous state is set.

  A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player, and an advantageous state in which the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game executing means when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. And a control means for facilitating setting of the advantageous state by the setting means when the privilege game is executed next based on the advantageous state being set by the setting means. A gaming machine A8 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine A8, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. When the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means, an advantageous state in which the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game executing means is set by the setting means. Based on the fact that the advantageous state has been set by the setting means, the advantageous state can be easily set by the control means by the setting means when the advantageous game is executed next time. It is possible to set it continuously. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

<Feature group B> (advantage, switching the disadvantage, blocking the disadvantage side)
A first lottery game based on the first ball entrance where game balls can enter, the second ball entrance different from the first ball entrance, and the fact that the first ball entrance is entered. The lottery game execution means that executes and executes the second lottery game based on having entered the second entrance, and the second lottery game is more disadvantageous to the player than the first lottery game A switching means for switching between one state and a second state in which the second lottery game is advantageous over the first lottery game based on a predetermined opportunity, and a lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player switched by the switching means A game machine B1 comprising: a restraining means for restraining execution of the game.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the first lottery game is executed by the lottery game execution means on the basis of having entered the first entrance. In addition, the second lottery game is executed by the lottery game execution means on the basis of having entered the second entrance different from the first entrance. The first state in which the second lottery game is more disadvantageous to the player than the first lottery game and the second state in which the second lottery game is advantageous over the first lottery game are switched by the switching means based on the predetermined opportunity Be It is suppressed by the suppressing means that the lottery game which is disadvantageous to the player switched by the switching means is executed. As a result, the disadvantageous lottery game is prevented from being executed by the suppression means, so that the player can easily execute the advantageous lottery game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that causes a significant disadvantage to the player.

  In the gaming machine B1, first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means, and second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means. Dynamic display means, and dynamic display period determination means for determining dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information that are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, The dynamic period determination means is longer than the dynamic display period of identification information corresponding to the lottery game in which the dynamic display period of identification information corresponding to the lottery game switched disadvantageously by the switching means is advantageously switched. A gaming machine B2 that makes it easy to determine a dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display unit by the dynamic display unit. Further, the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display unit by the dynamic display unit. Dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means are determined by the dynamic display period determination means. The dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game which is advantageously switched to the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game which is disadvantageously switched by the switching means is dynamically displayed It is easy to determine by means. Thereby, it is possible to suppress that the game switched to the disadvantage is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can discriminate a game that is advantageously set.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, it has a launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area, and an adjusting means for adjusting the firing force of the game ball launched by the launching means based on the operation of the player, The first ball entry port and the second ball entry port are disposed at positions where the game ball to be launched by the firing means can enter the ball while the player performs the same operation on the adjustment means. A gaming machine B3, which is characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the game ball is launched into the game area by the launching means. The launch force of the game ball launched by the launch means is adjusted by the adjustment means based on the operation of the player. The first ball entry port and the second ball entry port are arranged at positions where the game balls shot by the firing means can be entered while the player performs the same operation on the adjusting means. Thereby, the player can execute a lottery game advantageous to the player without changing the operation of the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be made easier.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, a bonus giving means for giving a bonus to the player when the lottery result of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is a specific lottery result, The privilege granting means is set such that a privilege grant ratio that is advantageous to a player is set higher when the specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery game than in the first lottery game. A game machine B4 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the lottery result of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is a specific lottery result, a privilege is given to the player by the privilege granting means. When a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery game as compared to the first lottery game, a privilege grant ratio that is advantageous to the player is set higher. Thereby, when the game in the second lottery game is set to the player in an advantageous manner, it is possible to set an advantageous state by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine B4, the privilege granting means is either the first privilege or the second privilege more advantageous than the first privilege as the privilege when the specific lottery result is obtained in the first lottery game. A game machine B5 characterized in that one is given, and the switching means switches to the second state on the basis of the fact that the second bonus is given by the bonus giving means.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a specific lottery result is obtained in the first lottery game, either one of the first benefit and the second benefit that is more advantageous than the first benefit is provided by the benefit providing means as a benefit. Based on the provision of the second privilege by the privilege granting means, the switching means switches to the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be changed.

  In the gaming machine B4 or B5, the first lottery game or the second lottery game is performed on the bonus awarded to the second lottery game by the bonus awarding unit until the specific condition is established. A gaming machine B6 characterized in that a rate at which a setting privilege set so as to easily become a specific lottery result is set higher than a privilege for the first lottery game.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the benefit given to the second lottery game by the privilege giving means is the first lottery game or until the specific condition is established. The second lottery game is executed because the rate at which the setting benefit is set so that the second lottery game is likely to be the specific lottery result is higher than the benefit for the first lottery game. This has the effect of improving the player's expectations.

  In the gaming machine B6, at least the setting privilege is awarded to the privilege to be given to the second lottery game by the privilege giving means. B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B6, at least the set privilege is provided to the privilege granted to the second lottery game by the privilege granting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the expectation that the second lottery game is executed can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, a first flow passage through which gaming balls can flow down, a second flow passage different from the first flow passage, and the first ball inlet and the first flow passage A gaming machine B8, which is arranged in each of the second flow paths, and the second entrance is arranged in the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the first entrance is arranged in the first flow path and the second flow path, respectively, Since it is arrange | positioned at 2 flow paths, it is effective in the state which can perform only a 1st lottery game being able to be set.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, when the lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed, the suppression unit notifies information indicating that the disadvantageous lottery game is being executed. A game machine B9 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the restraining means confirms that a disadvantageous lottery game is executed when a lottery game disadvantageous to the player is executed. Since the notification information to be shown is notified, there is an effect that the player can play the game more easily.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the gaming machine B10 characterized in that the lottery game executing means is configured to be capable of simultaneously executing the first lottery game and the second lottery game.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the first lottery game and the second lottery game are simultaneously executed by the lottery game execution means, so that the game can be played efficiently It has the effect of being able to

<Feature C group> (electric chew configuration)
A first lottery is executed based on the first ball entrance where game balls can enter, the second ball entrance different from the first ball entrance, and the ball entering the first ball entrance. And lottery means for executing a second lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery based on the game ball entering the second ball entrance, and the first ball entrance Variable means that can be varied between a first state that restricts entry and a second state that makes entry easier than the first state, determination means that executes determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and determination A variable control means for changing the variable means from the first state to the second state when a specific judgment result is judged by the means, and based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the second ball entrance It is characterized by having regulation means which regulates entering a ball or regulating that the said 2nd lottery is performed. Tricks machine C1.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the first lottery is executed by the lottery means based on having entered the first entrance. Further, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance, a second lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery is executed by the lottery means. The variable means changes the first state for restricting the ball entry into the first ball entrance and the second state for facilitating the ball entry more easily than the first state. The variable means is changed from the first state to the second state by the variable control means when the specific determination result is determined by the determination means that executes the determination based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the restriction means restricts the entrance to the second entrance and the execution of the second lottery. Thereby, a state advantageous to a player and a disadvantageous state can be set by the regulating means. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a change in interest and to improve the interest.

  In the gaming machine C1, the second entrance is disposed below the first entrance, and the variable means enters the second state, whereby the second entrance is entered into the second entrance by the variable means. The second ball entering ball is disposed so as to prevent the flow down of the game ball flowing down the flow path, and the restriction means is set so that the variable means is easily changed to the second state by the variable control means. A game machine C2 characterized by restricting entry into a mouth.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second ball entrance is disposed below the first ball entrance. When the variable means is in the second state, the variable means is disposed so as to prevent the game ball flowing down the flow path entering the second entrance by the variable means. By setting the variable means to be easily changed to the second state by the variable control means, the entry into the second entrance is restricted by the restriction means. Thereby, the ball entering the second ball entrance can be restricted with an easy configuration. Therefore, there is an effect that it can control that composition of a game machine becomes complicated.

  The gaming machine C1 or C2 has a first flow passage through which gaming balls can flow, and a second flow passage different from the first flow passage, and the first ball inlet is the first flow passage. And the second flow passage, wherein the variable means is disposed at the first ball inlet located in the second flow passage.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first entrance is arranged in the first flow path and the second flow path, respectively. Since the variable means is disposed at the first ball entry port disposed in the second flow path, the game ball having flowed down the second flow path can be configured to be easily entered into the first ball entry port.

  Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying first identification information indicating a lottery result by the first lottery and second identification information by the second lottery in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3 and the dynamic display thereof Dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed on the means, and the restricting means A game machine C4 characterized in that execution of the second lottery is restricted by making it easy to determine a long dynamic display period as the target display period by the dynamic display period determining means.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result by the first lottery and the second identification information by the second lottery are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period determining means determines the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means. By making the dynamic display period long as the dynamic display period for the second identification information easy to be determined by the dynamic display period determining means, the execution of the second lottery is restricted by the restricting means. Therefore, there is an effect that execution can be restricted to the second lottery with an easy configuration.

<Feature D group> (Continuous up configuration)
Based on the first ball entrance where game balls can enter, the second ball entrance different from the first ball entrance, and the fact that the game balls entered the first ball entrance, the first Lottery means for executing a second lottery, which is more advantageous for the player than the first lottery based on the lottery being executed and the game ball entering the second entrance, and the lottery means for the first lottery Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the lottery result on the display means and dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery on the display means; Dynamic display period determination means for determining dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information to be executed by the dynamic display means, and the dynamic display determination means for the second identification information A dynamic display period that is longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is easily determined as the dynamic display period. Setting means capable of setting a state and a short state in which a dynamic display period shorter than the long state is easily determined, and the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped in a specific stop display mode A bonus giving means for giving the player a benefit which is advantageous to the player when it is displayed, and a lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery as a benefit given to the player by the privilege giving means On the basis of the first identification information or the second identification information, wherein the first identification information or the second identification information is determined on the basis of at least the first benefit and the second benefit having less benefits than the first benefit. When one is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, if the other identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode different from the specific stop display mode. Stop indication And setting means for facilitating determination of the second benefit by the benefit determination means in the first lottery when the long state is set by the setting means. Gaming machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, on the basis of the game ball having entered the first entrance, the first lottery is executed by the lottery means. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance, a second lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery is executed by the lottery means. The first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery is dynamically displayed on the display unit by the dynamic display unit. Second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. Dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display means are respectively determined by the dynamic display period determination means. The long state in which a dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is easily determined as the dynamic display period of the second identification information by the dynamic display period determining means, and the dynamic state shorter than the long state The short state in which the display period is easily determined is set by the setting means. When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given to the player by the privilege giving means. At least the first benefit and the second benefit with less benefits than the first benefit based on the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery as the benefits awarded to the player by the privilege giving means Either is determined by the benefit determination means. When one of the first identification information and the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, if the other identification information is displayed dynamically, the dynamic display is displayed in a specific stop display mode A stop display mode different from that is stopped and displayed by the stop display means. When the long state is set by the setting means, the second bonus is easily set by the setting means by the benefit determination means in the first lottery. Thereby, the player can be expected to execute the second privilege with few privileges. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  The gaming machine D1 includes gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states based on a predetermined condition, and the setting means is set with a specific gaming state by the gaming state setting means. On the condition, the gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the second privilege is easily determined by the privilege determining means in the first lottery.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exerted. That is, one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states is set by the gaming state setting means based on a predetermined condition. Under the condition that a specific gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the second bonus is easily decided by the setting means by the bonus deciding means in the first lottery. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more expected to determine the second benefit when the specific gaming state is set.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the benefit is given by the benefit giving means, setting means for setting an advantageous state in which the benefit is easily given by the benefit giving means, and the advantageous state is set by the setting means Based on this, the gaming machine D3 includes a control unit that makes it easy to set the advantageous state by the setting unit even when the privilege is given next.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, in the case where a benefit is provided by the benefit applying means, an advantageous state in which the benefit is easily provided by the benefit applying means is set by the setting means. Based on the setting of the advantageous state by the setting means, the advantageous state is easily set by the setting means even when the privilege is given next by the control means. Therefore, the advantageous state is obtained across plural benefits. It is easy to set, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

<Feature E group> (Set the non-preceding probability variation rate low)
A first variable ball entry means capable of changing between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which game ball entry is more difficult than in the open state, and downstream from the first variable ball entry means A second variable ball entry means disposed in the game area, and a specific area where the game ball having entered the second variable ball entry means is capable of entering the ball, and the game ball having passed through the specific area; A privilege providing means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, and a predetermined variable pattern as the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means as a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the specific condition. Variable control means for changing the variable pattern by the variable control means, and determination means for determining the variable pattern variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. 1 variable entry means is in the closed state In this case, an advantageous pattern in which a game ball that has not entered the first variable entry means can enter the specific area, and a disadvantage that it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the advantageous pattern. A game machine E1 characterized in that at least a pattern is set.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player There are some games in which a privileged game that is advantageous is executed. In such a configuration, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as a privilege game has been proposed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only control to switch the entrance to be opened as a bonus game is being performed, and further improvement in the interest of the game has been desired. Furthermore, it aims at providing the gaming machine which improved the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine E1, since the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means, the player is made to be interested in the variable pattern It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine E1, the launching means capable of launching the gaming ball based on the operation of the player, the first entering means capable of entering the gaming ball launched by the launching means, and the first entering means A second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a ball entry assisting means for enabling the game ball to easily enter the second ball entering means than the first ball entering means, and the first ball entering means First determining means for executing the first determination based on the game ball entering the ball, and second determining means for performing the second determination based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means And first identification information indicating a first determination result of the first determination by the first determination means and second identification information indicating a second determination result of the second determination by the second determination means are simultaneously dynamic. Display means capable of being displayed, and the first identification information or the specific first determination result When the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is displayed, the game is executed by causing the game ball to enter the bonus game executing means for executing the bonus game and the second ball entering means The game state which sets one of the first state set to allow to be set and the second state set not to allow the game ball to enter the second ball entry means and to play a game When the first state is set by the setting means and the game state setting means and when the second state is set, the determination means determines the second determination result. A game machine E2 having rate variable means for changing the rate at which the advantageous pattern is set.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1, an advantageous pattern is set depending on whether the first state is set by the gaming state setting means or the second state is set. Since the ratio is variable by the ratio variable means, for example, if the ratio of the advantageous pattern is set low when the second state is set, the second ball entering means is made to enter the ball in the second state Even if fraud is done, the damage can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the ratio variable means sets the ratio of the second probability to be lower in the second state than in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, there is an effect that the damage can be reduced even when the fraud in the second state is performed.

  In any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the first flow path in which the game ball can enter the first ball entry means more easily than the second ball entry means, and the first channel than the first ball entry means A game machine E4 characterized by having a second flow passage in which game balls can be easily entered into the second entry means.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the entrance rate of the first entrance means and the second entrance means varies depending on the flow path. It is possible to change the game by the flow path, and to improve the interest of the player.

  In any one of the game machines E1 to E4, the game ball which has not entered the first variable ball entry means is interposed between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means. Guiding means for guiding to a variable pitching means over a predetermined period is arranged, and the disadvantageous pattern is a period shorter than the predetermined period after the first variable pitching means is changed to the closed state. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the second variable pitching means is changed to the opened state and then changed to the closed state.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the disadvantageous pattern can be performed with easy control so that it is difficult to enter the second variable entry means. There is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

<Feature F group> (advantage symbol disadvantage pattern is changed in opening period)
The first variable means capable of changing between an open state where the game ball can pass and a closed state where passage of the game ball is more difficult than the open state, and the first variable means is disposed downstream of the first variable means 1) The second variable ball entering means capable of entering the game ball having passed through the variable means, the specific area where the game ball entered into the second variable ball entering means is capable of entering the ball, and the game ball The first variable means and the second variable ball entering as a bonus game advantageous to the player based on establishment of the special condition providing means for awarding advantageous benefits to the player based on the passage. Variable control means for changing the means with a predetermined variable pattern, and determination means for determining the variable pattern variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns, and determined by the determination means In the variable pattern, An advantageous pattern in which the gaming ball having entered the first entering means can enter the specific area when the variable means is in the open state, and entering the specific area from the advantageous pattern The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that at least an unfavorable disadvantage pattern is set.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player There are some games in which a privileged game that is advantageous is executed. In such a configuration, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as a privilege game has been proposed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only control to switch the entrance to be opened as a bonus game is being performed, and further improvement in the interest of the game has been desired. Furthermore, it aims at providing the gaming machine which improved the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine F1, since the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable means and the second variable ball entering means, the player can be made to have an interest in the variable pattern. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first entrance means capable of entering a game ball launched from the launch means, and the first entrance means Is different from the second ball entering means, and the first discriminating means for performing the first discrimination based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means A second determination unit that executes a second determination based on the ball, first identification information indicating a first determination result of the first determination by the first determination unit, and the second determination unit that performs the second determination by the second determination unit The display means capable of simultaneously displaying the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the determination dynamically, and the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result When the second identification information indicating the second identification information is displayed on the display means, Note: When a bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means for executing the bonus game and the bonus game execution means, a game state setting in which one game state is set based on establishment of a predetermined condition from a plurality of different game states Means, and a rate setting means for variably setting the rate at which the advantageous pattern is set and the rate at which the disadvantageous pattern is set in accordance with the game state set by the game state setting means A game machine F2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F1, the ratio of setting the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern corresponding to the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means is variable. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player by varying the degree of expectation for the benefit given to the player.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, a first probability as a probability that the first determination unit or the second determination unit determines the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result, and the first probability Probability setting means for setting at least a high second probability, and the privilege given by the privilege giving means is such that at least the second probability is set by the probability setting means. Game machine F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, since the second probability is set by passing the specific area in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the gaming ball is kept in the specific area even while the bonus game is being executed. By giving interest to whether or not the game can be passed, there is an effect that the problem of getting bored with the game can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern are set such that at least a period from the start of the privilege game to the first variable means being in the open state is different. A game machine F4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the player determines the start of the bonus game at the timing when the first variable means is opened, so that the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern Can be difficult to identify to the player, and even in the case of a disadvantageous pattern, it is possible to expect a player to enter a specific area.

  The gaming machine F4 includes guiding means for guiding the game ball having passed through the first variable means to the second variable ball entering means for a predetermined period or more, and the disadvantageous pattern is that the first variable ball entering means is The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the second variable pitching means is at least set so as to be changed from the open state to the closed state within the predetermined period after the open state.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4, there is an effect that it is possible to more surely suppress the game ball from passing through the specific area in the disadvantageous pattern.

<Characteristic G group> (Advantageous design disadvantageous design can be changed by interval period)
A first variable ball entry means capable of changing between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which game ball entry is more difficult than in the open state, and downstream from the first variable ball entry means A second variable ball entry means disposed in the game area, and a specific area where the game ball having entered the second variable ball entry means is capable of entering the ball, and the game ball having passed through the specific area; A privilege providing means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, and a predetermined variable pattern as the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means as a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the specific condition. Variable control means for changing the variable pattern by the variable control means, and determination means for determining the variable pattern variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. 1 variable entry means is in the closed state In this case, an advantageous pattern in which a game ball that has not entered the first variable entry means can enter the specific area, and a disadvantage that it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the advantageous pattern. A game machine G1 characterized in that at least a pattern is set.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player There are some games in which a privileged game that is advantageous is executed. In such a configuration, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as a privilege game has been proposed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only control to switch the entrance to be opened as a bonus game is being performed, and further improvement in the interest of the game has been desired. Furthermore, it aims at providing the gaming machine which improved the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine G1, since the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, the player is interested in the variable pattern. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine G1, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern have at least a period from when the first variable ball entry means changes to the closed state to when the second variable ball entry means changes to the open state. A game machine G2 characterized by being set to be different.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, there is an effect that an advantageous pattern and a disadvantageous pattern can be set with easy control.

  In the game machine G1 or G2, between the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means, the game ball which has not entered the first variable ball entering means is inserted into the second variable ball entering means. Guiding means for guiding to the means over a predetermined period is arranged, and the disadvantageous pattern is the second variable in a period shorter than the predetermined period after the first variable pitching means is changed to the closed state. The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the ball entry means is changed to the open state and then changed to the closed state.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, there is an effect that it is possible to make it more difficult for the gaming ball to pass through the specific area with a disadvantageous pattern.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball based on the operation of the player, a first ball entering means capable of entering the gaming ball launched from the launching means, and First discrimination means for executing the first determination based on the second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and the second ball entering means Second discrimination means for executing a second discrimination based on the game ball entering the ball, and first identification information indicating the first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means and the second discrimination Display means capable of simultaneously dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a second determination result of the second determination by the means, and first identification information or a specific identification information indicating a specific first determination result When the second identification information indicating the second determination result is displayed on the display means A bonus game execution means for executing the bonus game, a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means, and the game A gaming machine G4, characterized by comprising ratio variable setting means for variably setting the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern corresponding to the gaming state set by the state setting means.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern is variably set corresponding to the gaming state, so the gaming state to be set is set. As a result, there is an effect that the degree of expectation for the game ball entering the specific area can be varied and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machines G1 to G4, a first probability that is determined as the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result by the first determination unit or the second determination unit, and a first probability that is higher than the first probability Probability setting means capable of setting either one of two probabilities is provided, and at least the second probability is set by the probability setting means for the privilege given by the privilege granting means. A game machine G5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine G5, since the second probability is set by passing through the specific area in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the specific area is also performed while the bonus game is being executed. By having an interest in whether or not the game ball is allowed to pass through, it is possible to suppress the trouble of getting bored with the game.

<Feature H group> (New Zero Attacker)
Condition determining means for determining whether the specific condition is satisfied, and an open state in which the game ball can enter from a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter based on the fact that the specific condition is determined by the condition determining means A first variable ball entry means that is variable to the second variable ball entry means, a second variable ball entry means that is arranged in parallel with the first variable ball entry means, and the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means. Based on the fact that the ball has entered, the privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, and the fact that the establishment of the specific condition is determined, the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game in which the ball entering means is varied in a predetermined order until the predetermined condition is established in the open state, the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means And the first variable ball entry means If the on purpose made, the gaming machine and wherein the time-to-game ball reaches the second variable ball entrance means those having a guide means for more than a predetermined period H1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player There are some games in which a privileged game that is advantageous is executed. In such a configuration, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as a privilege game has been proposed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, control is only performed to switch the entrance opening to be opened as a bonus game, and two variable winning devices are not used to form the flow-down path of the gaming ball, and a further game is performed. There was a need for improvement of interest. Furthermore, it aims at providing the gaming machine which improved the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine H1, even when the first variable pitching means is closed, the period until the second variable pitching means is reached by the guiding means is set to a predetermined period or longer. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball flows down without entering the second variable ball entry means before the ball entry means is opened, and the interest of the game is reduced.

  In the gaming machine H1, the effect executing means indicates an open effect indicating that the first variable entering means or the second variable entering means is in the open state when the first variable entering means or the second variable entering means is in the open state, and the first variable There is an effect executing means for performing at least a closing effect indicating that the ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are in the closed state when the ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are in the closed state respectively. A game machine H2 characterized by being executed by

  According to the gaming machine H2, in the closing effect, it is possible to notify that the closing state is used by using a predetermined period, so that it is possible to perform the effect that the player can easily understand.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means, the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are varied to the open state. The game machine H3 is characterized by having an opening pattern determining means for determining an opening pattern for which the number is set from a plurality of opening patterns.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the opening pattern can be made random because the opening pattern is determined based on a plurality of opening patterns, and various types of games can be made.

  In the gaming machine H3, a timing at which the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means is varied from the closed state to the open state is previously set in the open pattern determined by the open pattern determining means. A gaming machine H4, which is characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3, the timing for changing from the closed state to the open state is set in advance to the opening pattern, so the first variable entering means and the second variable entry according to the opening pattern. The number of gaming balls entering the ball means can be stabilized, and the advantage given to the player can be set based on the design value.

<Feature I group> (loop only twice for a predetermined period after the jackpot)
A player is given an advantageous benefit based on the state setting means capable of setting at least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state, and establishment of a predetermined condition. In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game different from the first bonus game, the state setting means sets the first advantageous state. If the first bonus game is executed while the first bonus game is being executed, the first advantageous state is set even after the first bonus game is executed, and the second bonus game is executed, The second advantage state is set after execution of the second benefit game, and when the first benefit game is executed with the second advantage state set, the first benefit Set the first advantageous state after playing a game, The second advantageous state is set when a specific condition is established without the first benefit game or the second benefit game being executed by the benefit game execution means after the first advantageous state is set. A gaming machine I1 characterized by

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board, a big hit lottery of a special symbol is performed, and based on the result of the lottery, the probability of becoming a big hit is There are those that give a high probability game with a high probability. In such a configuration, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the high probability gaming is continued until the jackpot is won twice (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-57583). In such a gaming machine, once a high-probability game is started, it is promised that the high-probability game will be continued and the player will win twice, so after the high-probability game is started, the player There was a problem of getting bored with games. The gaming machine I1 has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can alleviate the player's tiredness.

  According to the gaming machine I1, at least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state are set by the state setting means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the bonus game execution means executes at least a first bonus game for awarding a bonus advantageous to the player and a second bonus game different from the first bonus game. When the first benefit game is executed in a state where the first advantage state is set, the first advantage state is set by the state setting means even after the first benefit game is executed, and the second benefit When the game is executed, the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the second benefit game. In the state where the second advantageous state is set, when the first benefit game is executed, the first advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the first benefit game. When the specific condition is satisfied without the first benefit game or the second benefit game by the bonus game execution means being executed after the first advantage state is set, the first advantage state is set to the second advantage state Set Thereby, when the first privilege game is executed before the specific condition is established in the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state is set thereafter, so that the state advantageous to the player is continuously set. be able to. Therefore, the advantageous state can be continued until a plurality of bonus games are executed, and the player's interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I1, the bonus game execution means is capable of executing a third bonus game different from the first bonus game and the second bonus game, and the state setting means is in the first advantageous state It is possible to set a specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than any of the second advantageous state, and when the third bonus game is executed in the state where the second advantageous state is set. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that the specific state is set after the third privilege game is executed.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. The state setting means sets a specific state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. In the state where the second advantageous state is set, when the third bonus game is performed, the specific state is set by the state setting unit after the third bonus game is performed. Thereby, in the second advantageous state, the specific gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player when the third gaming state is executed is set, so that the continuing state of the advantageous state can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the gambling nature of the game becomes too high.

  The gaming machine I1 or I2 has a discriminating unit for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the predetermined condition is met when the discrimination result by the discrimination unit is a specific discrimination result. A gaming machine I3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination is predetermined when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a particular discrimination result Therefore, the player can play a game with an interest in the discrimination result by the discrimination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  A gaming machine I4 according to any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, wherein the specific condition is satisfied when the determination condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I4, since the specific condition is satisfied when the determination condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times, the player must complete the determination condition a predetermined number of times, The game is played while expecting that the predetermined condition is established. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Probability setting means for setting at least one of a first probability determined as the specific determination result by the determination means and a second probability higher than the first probability in any one of the gaming machines I3 and I4 And the second probability is set by the probability setting unit in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I3 or I4, the following effects are produced. That is, the probability setting means sets at least one of a first probability determined to be a specific determination result by the determination means and a second probability that is higher than the first probability. In the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the second probability is set by the probability setting means. As a result, in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, it is possible to increase the possibility that the determination result by the determination means becomes a specific determination result in a short period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristics J group> (Award distribution structure to attackers)
An open state in which the game ball can enter from a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter based on the condition determination means for determining establishment of the specific condition and that the establishment of the specific condition is determined by the condition determination means A first variable pitching means that is variable, a second variable pitching means disposed downstream of the first variable pitching means, and the first variable pitching means or the second variable pitching means. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, and based on the fact that the specific condition has been established, the first variable pitching means and the second A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for changing the variable pitching means in a predetermined order until a predetermined condition is established in the open state; the first variable pitching means; and the first variable pitching means. Assign at least gaming balls to the downstream side of the ball means The first distribution means, and the game balls distributed by the first distribution means to the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means are disposed on the second variable ball input means and the downstream side of the second variable ball input means. A gaming machine J1 characterized by having at least a second sorting means for sorting.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, a big hit lottery of a special symbol is carried out, and the game is played if the result of the lottery is a big hit There is a game that provides a big hit game in which a game ball enters a big winning opening provided on the board. In such a configuration, a gaming machine provided with two large winning openings on the game board surface has been proposed (e.g., JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, a game ball that did not enter one large winning opening does not enter the other large winning opening, and there is a problem that the flow of gaming balls on the game board surface is poor . The gaming machine J1 is made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing the ball flow of the gaming ball which has the player's expectation.

  According to the gaming machine J1, the condition determining means determines that the specific condition is established, and based on the determination that the specific condition is established, the game ball can enter the closed state where the game ball can not enter easily. The first variable pitching means is varied according to the state. A second variable ball entry means is disposed downstream of the first variable ball entry means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means, the privilege giving means gives the player an advantageous advantage. Based on the determination of the establishment of the specific condition, the first variable ball entering device and the second variable ball entering device are opened by the bonus game executing device in the predetermined order until the predetermined condition is satisfied. Execute a bonus game to be varied. The first distributing means distributes at least the game balls to the first variable ball entering means and the downstream side of the first variable ball entering means, and the game balls distributed to the downstream side of the first variable ball entering means are The distribution means distributes at least the second variable entry means and the downstream side of the second variable entry means. Thereby, the game ball distributed to the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means can be allowed to enter the second variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing the ball flow of the gaming ball that holds the player's expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine J1, the first sorting means and the second sorting means are a pivoting portion capable of pivoting in a first direction and a second direction opposite to the first direction, and a pivoting portion thereof The game machine J2 is characterized by having at least a restricting means for restricting the rotation range at a predetermined angle.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the first sorting means and the second sorting means are in the first direction by the turning portion and in the second direction opposite to the first direction. Since the rotation range of the rotation portion is restricted at a predetermined angle by the restriction means, it becomes possible to execute proper distribution operation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

  In the gaming machine J2, the first sorting means and the second sorting means are configured to be alternately rotated in the first direction and the second direction by the flowing gaming balls. A gaming machine J3.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J2, the first sorting means and the second sorting means are configured to be alternately rotated in the first direction and the second direction by the flowing gaming balls. As a result, it is possible to execute more appropriate distribution operation.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the first variable ball entry means is in a closed state, the game ball is guided by the guiding means for guiding the game ball to the second variable ball entry means, and When the second variable ball entering means is in the closed state, it has a guiding path for guiding the guided game ball to the second distributing means when the second variable ball entering means is in the closed state. A gaming machine J4 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1 or the gaming machine J2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first variable pitching means is closed, the game ball is guided to the second variable pitching means by the guiding means. When the game ball is guided to the second variable ball entry means by the guidance means, the induced game ball is guided to the second distribution means when the second variable ball entry means is in the closed state. And an induction path. Thereby, the rotation state of the second distribution means can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to make the distribution of the game balls by the distribution member complicated and to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic K group> (Probability rate of one symbol is normally regulated by a variation method other than simultaneous variation)
A first variable ball entry means capable of changing between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which game ball entry is more difficult than in the open state, and downstream from the first variable ball entry means A second variable ball entry means disposed in the game area, and a specific area where the game ball having entered the second variable ball entry means is capable of entering the ball, and the game ball having passed through the specific area; A privilege providing means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, and a predetermined variable pattern as the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means as a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the specific condition. Variable control means for changing the variable pattern by the variable control means, and determination means for determining the variable pattern variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. 1 variable entry means is in the closed state In this case, an advantageous pattern in which a game ball that has not entered the first variable entry means can enter the specific area, and a disadvantage that it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the advantageous pattern. A game machine K1 characterized in that at least a pattern is set.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player There are some games in which a privileged game that is advantageous is executed. In such a configuration, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as a privilege game has been proposed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only control to switch the entrance to be opened as a bonus game is being performed, and further improvement in the interest of the game has been desired. Furthermore, it aims at providing the gaming machine which improved the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine K1, since the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, the player is made to be interested in the variable pattern It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine K1, on the basis of the operation of the player, the launching means capable of launching the gaming ball, the first entering means capable of entering the gaming ball launched from the launching means, and the first entering means A second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a ball entry assisting means for enabling the game ball to easily enter the second ball entering means than the first ball entering means, and the first ball entering means First discriminating means for executing a first discrimination based on the game ball having entered the game, and second discrimination means for executing a second discrimination based on the game ball having entered the second ball entering means. , First identification information indicating a first determination result of the first determination by the first determination means, and second identification information indicating a second determination result of the second determination by the second determination means are displayed, respectively. Display means, or any one of the first identification information and the second identification information. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means based on the priority order, the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result, or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result When it is displayed, a bonus game execution means for executing the bonus game, a first state set by allowing the game ball to enter the second ball entry means to perform a game, and the first state 2 game state setting means for setting one of the second state set so as not to allow the player to enter the game ball into the ball entering means and the first state by the game state setting means Ratio changing means for changing the rate at which the advantageous pattern is set by the determining means when the second specific determination result is obtained when the second state is set and when the second state is set; Is characterized by having Game machine K2 to.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K1, an advantageous pattern is set depending on whether the first state is set by the gaming state setting means or the second state is set. Since the ratio is variable by the ratio variable means, for example, if the ratio of the advantageous pattern is set low when the second state is set, the second ball entering means is made to enter the ball in the second state There is an effect that it is possible to reduce the damage even if the fraud is done.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, in the second state, the ratio changing means sets the ratio of the second probability to be lower than that in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1 or K2, there is an effect that the damage can be reduced even when the fraud in the second state is performed.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, a first flow path that allows a game ball to enter the first ball entry means more easily than the second ball entry means, and the first ball entry means than the first ball entry means. A game machine K4 characterized by having a second flow passage in which game balls can be easily entered into the second entry means.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the ball entry ratio of the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is varied by the flow path, so the gaming balls flow It is possible to change the game by the flow path, and to improve the interest of the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means is inserted between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means. Guiding means for guiding to a variable pitching means over a predetermined period is arranged, and the disadvantageous pattern is a period shorter than the predetermined period after the first variable pitching means is changed to the closed state. A game machine K5 characterized in that the second variable ball entry means is varied to the open state after being varied to the open state.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K5, in the disadvantageous pattern, it is possible to perform easy control so that it is difficult to enter the second variable ball entry means There is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

<Characteristic L group> (The probability variation rate is varied by the opening and interval in a configuration other than simultaneous variation)
A first variable ball entry means capable of changing between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which game ball entry is more difficult than in the open state, and downstream from the first variable ball entry means A second variable ball entry means disposed in the game area, and a specific area where the game ball having entered the second variable ball entry means is capable of entering the ball, and the game ball having passed through the specific area; A privilege providing means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, and a predetermined variable pattern as the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means as a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the specific condition. Variable control means for changing the variable pattern by the variable control means, and determination means for determining the variable pattern variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. 1 variable entry means is in the closed state In this case, an advantageous pattern in which a game ball that has not entered the first variable entry means can enter the specific area, and a disadvantage that it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the advantageous pattern. A game machine L1 characterized in that at least a pattern is set.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player There are some games in which a privileged game that is advantageous is executed. In such a configuration, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as a privilege game has been proposed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only control to switch the entrance to be opened as a bonus game is being performed, and further improvement in the interest of the game has been desired. Furthermore, it aims at providing the gaming machine which improved the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine L1, since the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, making the player have an interest in the variable pattern It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L1, a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball based on the operation of a player, a first entering means capable of entering the gaming ball launched by the launching means, and the first entering means Is different from the second ball entering means, and the first discriminating means for performing the first discrimination based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means A second determination unit that executes a second determination based on the ball, first identification information indicating a first determination result of the first determination by the first determination unit, and the second determination unit that performs the second determination by the second determination unit Display means capable of displaying second identification information indicating a second determination result of the determination, and any one of the first identification information and the second identification information in a predetermined priority order Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the basis of the display means, and the specific first determination A bonus game execution means for executing the bonus game when the first identification information indicating the result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the display means, and the bonus game execution When the bonus game is executed by the means, the advantage pattern corresponding to the game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states and the game state set by the game state setting means And a ratio variable setting means for variably setting the ratio between the disadvantage pattern and the gaming machine L2.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1, the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern is variably set corresponding to the gaming state. There is an effect that the degree of expectation for the ball to enter the ball can be changed to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L1 or L2, a first probability that is determined as the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result by the first determination unit or the second determination unit and a first probability that is higher than the first probability Probability setting means capable of setting either one of two probabilities is provided, and at least the second probability is set by the probability setting means for the privilege given by the privilege granting means. A game machine L3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine L3, since the second probability is set by passing the specific area in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L1 or L2, the gaming ball is kept in the specific area even while the bonus game is being executed. By giving interest to whether or not the game can be passed, there is an effect that the problem of getting bored with the game can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern change the second variable ball entering means into the open state after the first variable ball entering means changes the closed state. The game machine L4 is characterized in that the time periods until at least the two are set to be different.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, there is an effect that the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern can be set by easy control.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L4, a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means is inserted between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means. A guiding means for guiding to the variable ball entering means over a predetermined period is disposed, and the disadvantageous pattern is set to be shorter than the predetermined period after the first variable ball entering means is changed to the closed state. A game machine L5 characterized in that the second variable ball entry means is varied to the open state after being varied to the open state.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines L1 to L4, there is an effect that it is possible to make it more difficult for the gaming ball to pass through the specific area with a disadvantageous pattern.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5 In any case, the gaming machine Z1 is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5 In any case, the gaming machine Z2 is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5 In any one of the above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player An advantageous bonus game was being executed.
Furthermore, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of bonus games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as a bonus game has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765).
By the way, the above-described gaming machine only performs control to switch the entrance to be opened as a bonus game, and further enhancement of the interest of the game has been demanded.
The present technical idea aims to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved in the above-described gaming machine.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 is a first variable that can be changed between an open state where the game ball can enter and a closed state where entry of the game ball is more difficult than the open state. A ball entry means, a second variable ball entry means arranged downstream of the first variable ball entry means, a specific area in which a game ball entered into the second variable ball entry means can enter, Based on the passing of the game ball through the specific area, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to the player, and a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the specific condition, the first variable input Variable control means for changing the ball means and the second variable ball entry means in a predetermined variable pattern; and a determination means for determining the variable pattern variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. And the variable pattern determined by the determining means An advantageous pattern that allows a game ball that has not entered the first variable entry means to enter the specific area when the first variable entry means is in the closed state; and At least a disadvantageous pattern in which it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the advantageous pattern is set.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern are changed after the first variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state. The period until the ball means is changed to the open state is set to be at least different.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the first variable ball entering means is located between the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means. Guidance means for guiding a game ball that has not entered into the second variable entry means is arranged over a predetermined period of time, and the disadvantageous pattern is that the first variable entry means is changed to the closed state. Further, the second variable ball entering device is changed to the open state in a period shorter than the predetermined period, and then changed to the closed state.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the launching means capable of launching the game ball based on the operation of the player and the game launched from the launching means First discrimination based on a first entry means capable of entering a ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, and a game ball entering the first entry means. The first determination means for executing the first determination, the second determination means for executing the second determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means, and the first determination means by the first determination means. Display means capable of simultaneously dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the first determination result and the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the second determination by the second determination means; The first identification information indicating the first determination result or the second indicating the specific second determination result A bonus game execution means for executing the bonus game when the separate information is displayed on the display means, and a game from one of a plurality of different game states when the bonus game is performed by the bonus game execution means A gaming state setting means for setting a state, and a ratio variable setting means for variably setting the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern in accordance with the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means It is.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the first variable ball entering means capable of changing between the opened state where the game ball can enter and the closed state where entering the game ball is more difficult than the opened state A second variable entry means disposed downstream of the first variable entry means, a specific area in which a game ball entering the second variable entry means can enter, and the specific area Based on the passing of the game ball, a privilege granting unit that gives a privilege advantageous to the player, and based on the establishment of the specific condition, the first variable ball entry unit and the first variable ball entry unit as a privilege game advantageous to the player A variable control means for changing the second variable pitching means with a predetermined variable pattern; and a determination means for determining the variable pattern variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. The variable pattern determined by the means includes An advantageous pattern in which a game ball that has not entered the first variable entry means when the variable entry means is in the closed state can enter the specific area; At least a disadvantageous pattern that makes it difficult to enter the area is set. Thereby, since the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means, the player can be interested in the variable pattern, and the game There is an effect that can improve the interest of.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern have at least a different period from when the first variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state to when the second variable ball entry means is changed to the open state. It is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is exerted. That is, between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means is given to the second variable ball entry means for a predetermined period. A guiding means for guiding in accordance with the above is disposed, and the disadvantageous pattern is determined by setting the second variable entering means in a period shorter than the predetermined period after the first variable entering means is changed to the closed state. After being changed to the open state, it is changed to the closed state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, the following effect is exerted in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines described in the technical idea 1 to 3. That is, a launching means capable of launching game balls based on the operation of the player, a first entering means capable of entering the gaming balls launched from the launching means, and a first different from the first entering means 2 ball entry means, first discrimination means for executing a first discrimination based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and game ball entering the second ball entry means Based on the second discrimination means for executing the second discrimination, the first identification information indicating the first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination means by the second discrimination means. Display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the two determination results simultaneously, and the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result A bonus for executing the bonus game when the second identification information is displayed on the display means A technique execution means, a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means, and a game set by the game state setting means Corresponding to the state, there is provided a ratio variable setting means for variably setting the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
65 First variable prize winning device ( second variable pitching means)
81 3rd symbol display device (part of display means)
630 First starting port (first entrance)
640 2nd starting port (2nd entrance )
650 second variable winning device (first variable pitching means)
S305 part S705 part S1604 benefits game execution means of the second determination hand stage S1655 gaming state setting means in the first determination means S306 Dynamic Display unit

Claims (2)

Launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation;
First ball entering means capable of entering a game ball launched from the launching means, and second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means;
First determining means capable of performing a first determination based on the game ball entering the first entering means;
A second determination means capable of performing a second determination based on the game ball entering the second entering means;
Displaying first identification information for indicating a first determination result of the first determination by the first determination means and second identification information for indicating a second determination result of the second determination by the second determination means Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the means;
It is advantageous to the player when the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the display means. A privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game;
A first variable ball entry means capable of changing between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which entry of the game ball is more difficult than in the open state;
A second variable input that is arranged downstream of the first variable entry means and is variable between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than in the open state. Ball means,
A specific area in which a game ball entering the second variable entry means can enter;
In a gaming machine having a bonus awarding means for awarding advantageous benefits to a player based on passage of a gaming ball through the specific area.
Game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means;
Variable control means capable of changing the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means in a predetermined variable pattern as the bonus game;
And determining means capable of determining the variable pattern varied by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns,
The game ball which has not entered the first variable ball entry means rolls the guiding path disposed between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means for a predetermined period of time or longer. It can be guided to a second variable ball entry means,
In the plurality of different variable patterns, the game ball which has entered the second variable ball entry means in the period after the predetermined period has passed after the first variable ball entry means is closed is specified. An advantageous variable pattern in which an open state is set in a state where it is possible to enter a ball in an area, and the guidance without entering the first variable ball entry means after the first variable ball entry means is closed. By rolling the road for the predetermined period, at least a disadvantageous variable pattern in which the open state is set such that the game ball entering the second variable ball entry means can not pass through the specific area. Are
In the gaming machine, the ratio between the advantageous variable pattern and the disadvantageous variable pattern determined by the determining means is variably set corresponding to the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means. A game machine characterized by   2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means is constituted by a liquid crystal display.

Images